Contents

Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 450
1 of 450

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual PDF

Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Familiarize yourself with the con- tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multime- dia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Here you can nd comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

2385842411@ 2385842411

Order no. P238 0847 13 Part no. 238 584 24 11 Edition B-2022

E-Class Convertible Operator's Manual

Mercedes-BenzMe rce

de s-B

en z

E-C las

sC on

ver tib

le

Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Documentation team MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla- ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany

Front passenger airbag warning

Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co- driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

As at 17.02.21

Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you rst drive o , read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operat- ing lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre- gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol- lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability

Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual cases, from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features

The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements R Supplementary documents

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

2385842411

2385842411

Symbols .......................................................... 5

At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps .......................... 10 Overhead control panel ................................. 12 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 14 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 16

Digital Operator's Manual .............................. 18 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ........ 18

General notes ............................................... 20 Protection of the environment ....................... 20 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ....................... 20 Operator's Manual ........................................ 21 Service and vehicle operation ........................ 22 Operating safety ............................................ 23 Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components ........................... 25 Diagnostics connection ................................. 26 Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ 27 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 27

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. 27 Problems with your vehicle ............................ 28 Reporting safety defects ................................ 28 Limited Warranty ........................................... 29 QR code for rescue card ............................... 29 Data storage ................................................. 29 Copyright ...................................................... 34

Occupant safety ............................................ 35 Restraint system ........................................... 35 Seat belts ..................................................... 37 Airbags ......................................................... 42 Roll bar ......................................................... 49 PRE-SAFE system ........................................ 49 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... 50 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 63

Opening and closing ...................................... 64 SmartKey ...................................................... 64 Doors ............................................................ 68 Trunk ............................................................ 71 So top ......................................................... 75

Installing and removing the folding wind screen .......................................................... 79 Side windows ................................................ 82 Anti-the protection ...................................... 85

Seats and stowing ......................................... 87 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .... 87 Seats ............................................................ 88 Steering wheel .............................................. 98 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 100 Memory function ......................................... 101 Stowage areas ............................................ 102 Sockets ....................................................... 108 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .... 109 Installing and removing the oor mats ......... 111

Light and visibility ........................................ 112 Exterior lighting ........................................... 112 Interior lighting ............................................ 120 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 121 Mirrors ........................................................ 125

2 Contents

Climate control ........................................... 129 Overview of climate control systems ............ 129 Operating the climate control system .......... 130

Driving and parking ..................................... 136 Driving ........................................................ 136 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 148 Automatic transmission ............................... 150 Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 154 Refueling ..................................................... 154 Parking ....................................................... 156 Driving and driving safety systems ............... 163 Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 216

Instrument display and on-board com- puter ........................................................... 217 Notes on the instrument display and on- board computer .......................................... 217 Overview of instrument display .................... 218 Overview of buttons on the steering wheel ... 219 Operating the on-board computer ................ 219 Overview of displays on the instrument display ........................................................ 221 Head-up Display .......................................... 221

MBUX multimedia system ............................ 224 Overview and operation ............................... 224 System settings .......................................... 232 Navigation ................................................... 236 Telephone ................................................... 244 Mercedes me app ....................................... 248 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... 255 Radio & media ............................................. 258 Sound settings ............................................ 265

Maintenance and care ................................. 266 ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 266 Engine compartment ................................... 267 Cleaning and care ....................................... 273

Breakdown assistance ................................. 282 Emergency .................................................. 282 Flat tire ....................................................... 283 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 289 Tow starting or towing away ........................ 294 Electrical fuses ............................................ 298

Wheels and tires ......................................... 302 Notes on noise or unusual handling char- acteristics ................................................... 302 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ 302 Notes on snow chains ................................. 303 Tire pressure ............................................... 303 Loading the vehicle ..................................... 309 Tire labeling ................................................ 314 De nition of terms for tires and loading ....... 319 Changing a wheel ........................................ 321 Emergency spare wheel ............................... 331

Technical data ............................................. 333 Notes on technical data .............................. 333 Vehicle electronics ...................................... 333 Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... 335 Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. 335 Operating uids ........................................... 337 Vehicle data ................................................ 344

Contents 3

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps .......................................................... 346 Display messages ........................................ 346 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 399

Index .......................................................... 416

4 Contents

In this Operator's Manual, you will nd the follow- ing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environ- mental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi- ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being dam- aged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

# Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Display eld in the Instrument Dis-

play/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be

selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be

selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause

Symbols 5

Le -hand-drive vehicles

6 At a glance Cockpit

1 Steering wheel gearshi paddles 152 2 Combination switch 113 3 Instrument display 218 4 DIRECT SELECT lever 150 5 Media display 224 6 Start/stop button 137 7 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applications 227 8 Climate control systems 130 9 Glove box 105 A Hazard warning light system 114 B Storage compartment 105 C Touchpad 227 D 8 Controller for volume and switching

sound on/o 224

E Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/o

224

F Extends/retracts the seat belt feeder 40

G Opens/closes the so top 75

H Activates/deactivates AIRCAP 78

I Opens the storage compartment 105 J Opens/closes the side windows 82

K ECO start/stop function 145 Lc Active Parking Assist 211

M Sets the vehicle level 198 N DYNAMIC SELECT switch 149 O PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 46 P Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 219 Q Adjusts the steering wheel mechanically 98 R Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 99

Switches the steering wheel heater on/o

99

S Control panel:

On-board computer 219

Cruise control 172

At a glance Cockpit 7

H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 175

T Diagnostics connection 26 U Opens the hood 267

V ! Electric parking brake 160 W Light switch 112

8 At a glance Cockpit

Instrument display

10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps

1 #! Turn signal lights 113 2 6 Restraint system 401 3 ESP OFF 411

ESP 411

4 R Rear fog light 113 5 K High beam 113

L Low beam 112

T Parking lights 112 6 Coolant temperature 403

7 Coolant temperature display 218 8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 407 9 Recuperative Brake System, USA only 407

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 407 A # Electrical malfunction 403 BL Distance warning 410

C ! ABS 411 D Electric power steering 402

E h Tire pressure monitoring system 414 F 8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location

indicator 403

G Fuel level 218 H Electric parking brake (red) 407

F USA only

! Canada only I Brakes (red) 407

$ USA only

J Canada only J Seat belt 401 K ; Check Engine 403 L Suspension 410

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps 11

12 At a glance Overhead control panel

1 p Switches the le -hand reading lamp on/o

120

2 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o 120 3 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o 120 4 | Switches automatic interior lighting con-

trol on/o 120

5 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/o

120

6 Sun visors 7 Eyeglasses compartment 8; me button 248

9 Inside rearview mirror 126 A G SOS button 248

At a glance Overhead control panel 13

14 At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment

1 Adjusts the seats electrically 90 2w Switches the seat heating on/o 95

3 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o 96 4U Switches AIRSCARF on/o 97

5 &% Locks/unlocks the vehicle 68 6 p Opens the trunk lid 71 7 Operates the outside mirrors 125 8 W Opens/closes the right side window 82 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side window 82 AT Child safety lock for the rear side win-

dows 62

B W Opens/closes the rear le side window 82 C W Opens/closes the le side window 82 D Opens the door 68 EV Operates the memory function 102

F Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position 88 G Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support 91 H Con gures the seat settings 93 I Adjusts the head restraints 91 J Adjusts the seat height 88 K Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 88

At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 15

16 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns

1 B-pillar with:

QR code for accessing the rescue card 29 2 Safety vests 282 3; me button 248

G SOS button 248 4 Checking and re lling operating uids 337 5 Tow-starting or towing away 295 6 Flat tire 283 7 Starting assistance 292

8 Hazard warning light system 114 9 Fuel ller ap with:

information label on fuel type 154

Information label on tire pressure 305

QR code for accessing the rescue card 29 A Tow-starting or towing away 295 B TIREFIT kit 285 C First-aid kit (so sided) 283 D Warning triangle 282

At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 17

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5

The Digital Operator's Manual describes the func- tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi- media system. # Select one of the following menu items in the

Digital Operator's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to nd

quick answers to questions about the opera- tion of the vehicle.

R Quick start: here is where you nd the rst steps towards setting up your vehicle. R Tips: nd information that prepares you for

certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle

functions. R Messages: receive additional information

about the messages in the Instrument Display. R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally

saved bookmarks. R Language: select the language for the Digital

Operator's Manual.

1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu

Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and col- lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Oper- ator's Manual:

18 Digital Operator's Manual

Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated while driving.

Digital Operator's Manual 19

Protection of the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi- ronment. Please observe the following recom- mendations on operating conditions and per- sonal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor-

rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no lon- ger need them).

# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the vehicle while sta-

tionary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable

distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking. # Change gear in good time and use each

gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.

# Switch o the vehicle in stationary traf- fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.

# Drive in a fuel-e cient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driv- ing style.

Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regula- tions serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon- ditioned components

MercedesBenz AG o ers recycled recondi- tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned components

and parts from MercedesBenz AG.

20 General notes

* NOTE Impairment of the operating e - ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol- lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame # Do not install accessory parts such as

audio systems in these areas. # Do not carry out repairs or welding. # Have accessory parts retro tted at a

quali ed specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and acces- sory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been spe- cially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 di erent genuine Mercedes- Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz mod- els. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for neces- sary service and repair work. In addition, strategi- cally located parts delivery centers provide for quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) (/ page 335) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual and the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle describe the following mod- els and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle: R The models and the standard and special

equipment available at the time of this Opera- tor's Manual going to press. R The models and the standard and special

equipment only available in certain countries. R The models and the standard and special

equipment, which will only be available at a later date.

Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equip- ment on your vehicle may di er from that in the descriptions and illustrations.

General notes 21

The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery. Should you have any questions concerning equip- ment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual, Supplement, further sup- plementary documents and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not

be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi-

cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane

number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author- ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Maintenance

Your customer advisor con rms the service in the service report.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program o ers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can nd further information in the Mercedes- Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will nd both in the vehicle document wallet.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Noti cation of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We

22 General notes

can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces- sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera- ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim- ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Possible danger due to substances hazardous to health

In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:

Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal- functions or system failures

To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and

maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a quali ed special- ist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modi cations on electronic component parts

Modi cation of electronic components, their so ware or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com- ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec-

tronic component parts or their so - ware.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

General notes 23

& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust sys- tem

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or o -

road, regularly check the vehicle under- side.

# Remove trapped plants or other amma- ble material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv- ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo- nents

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a

high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an

obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot- hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or

suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo- nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon- ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, am- mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the

underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired

immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

or # If driving safety is impaired while con-

tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and tra c conditions, and contact a quali ed specialist work- shop.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys- tem contain individual high-voltage compo- nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.

24 General notes

If you modify component parts of these high- voltage components or touch damaged com- ponent parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modi cations to compo-

nent parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts

of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of high-

voltage components a er an accident.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These compo- nents are marked with a high voltage label:

All work on high voltage components must be car- ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components

USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub- ject to the following two conditions: 1) These devi- ces may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.Changes or modi cations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno- vation, Science and Economic Development Can- adas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference. (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation of the devices." "Les metteurs/rcepteurs dans cette vhicule sont conforme aux CNR dInnovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux con- ditions suivantes : 1) Ces appareils ne doivent pas produire de brouillage; 2) Ces appareils doivent accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den com- promettre le fonctionnement."

General notes 25

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter- face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be con- nected by a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con- necting devices to the diagnostics con- nection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics con- nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that

you only use and connect products approved by your authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devi- ces connected to the diagnostics connec- tion

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the bat- tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis- tance.

Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 141).

26 General notes

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following e ects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos- tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require- ments of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Quali ed specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- ed specialist workshop. It has the necessary

special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works.

Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a quali ed specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modi cations as well as installations and con-

versions R Work on electronic components R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system:

work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system

MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service center.

Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R The safety notes in this Operator's Manual,

vehicle-speci c supplements and further sup- plementary documents R Technical data for the vehicle R Tra c rules and regulations R Laws and safety standards pertaining to motor

vehicles

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par with permanent magnets. These elds can be found, for example, in the area around the multi- media and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

General notes 27

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health e ects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac- turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil- ity of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes- Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehi- cle, particularly one that you believe may a ect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and recti ed. If the prob- lem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only: The following text is published as required of man- ufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Tra c and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Tra c Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it nds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA.

28 General notes

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https://www.safercar.gov

Canada only: The following text is published as required of man- ufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it nds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in indi- vidual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information:

R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels

Limited Warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat-

ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi- cle damage.

QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for

your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data storage Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi- cle. Control units process data which, for exam- ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe oper- ation of your vehicle, some assist you when driv- ing, such as driver assistance systems, while oth- ers enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general informa- tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose,

General notes 29

can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective Operator's Manual. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehi- cle equipment, digitally.

Personal data Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle identi cation number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identi cation number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to deter- mine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a per- son. Depending on which vehicle data are availa- ble, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide govern- mental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investi- gation of a criminal o ense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ- ual cases and within the applicable legal frame- work, authorized to read out data from the vehi- cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.

Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,

longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain

sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of oper- ation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units o en contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operat- ing state, component loads, maintenance require- ments and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components, such

as ll levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system

components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situations,

such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle dam-

age

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tempo- rarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.

30 General notes

If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identi cation number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as break- down services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obliga- tions and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identi cation number to the manufacturer. Fur- thermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for exam- ple, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.

Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, lms or pho-

tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system

R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integra- ted navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par- ticular, when you use online services in accord- ance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart-

General notes 31

phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smart- phone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of addi- tional data processing is determined by the pro- vider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online services

Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless net- work connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end

device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manu- facturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's web- site, where the relevant data protection informa- tion is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any per- sonal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permis- sion. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva-

ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibil- ity of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no in uence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on o er, you are entitled to di erent data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and

32 General notes

service o ers. There you will also nd the contact information for the manufacturer and its data pro- tection o cers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multime- dia system or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multi- media system or Mercedes me connect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders

USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand- ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were

operating R Whether or not the driver and front passenger

seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which accidents and inju- ries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- ing conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,

could combine EDR data with the type of person- ally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu- facturer, other parties that have the special equip- ment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with- out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les- see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or

General notes 33

its subsidiaries and a liates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modify- ing or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that con ict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such con ict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Copyright Free and open source so ware

Information on license for free and open-source so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks R Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth SIG, Inc. R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trade-

marks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-

tex Corporation. R iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc. R Burmester is a registered trademark of

Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microso and Windows Media are regis-

tered trademarks of Microso Corporation. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.

R Gracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. R ZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis-

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

34 General notes

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following com- ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu- pants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro- tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension- ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro- tection o ered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their

back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi-

ble. R Always secure persons under 5 (1.50 m) tall

in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modi cations to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint sys-

tem. # Never tamper with the wiring or any elec-

tronic component parts or their so - ware.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom- modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assis- tance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Restraint system functionality

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per- formed, during which the 6 restraint system

Occupant safety 35

warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The com- ponents of the restraint system are then func- tional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys- tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does

not light up when the vehicle is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights

up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as plan- ned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and

repaired immediately at a quali ed spe- cialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an accident

How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari- ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp- tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and measured a er a collision has occurred do not play a deci- sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is

not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle su ers only minor defor- mation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitu- dinal members are hit, this may result in su - ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact,

rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal

impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Head airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal

impact

The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air- bag is correct (/ page 46).

36 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components

The air bag parts are hot a er an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a

quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. Take this into account, particu- larly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig- gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing. R In general, the powder released is not hazard-

ous to health but may cause short-term breathing di culties to persons su ering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing di culties.

Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protec- tion measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search func- tion, you will nd information on perchlorate, for example.

Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function.

In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants

have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 87). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t

tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen-

ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat.

Occupant safety 37

R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul- der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin-

ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at

any one time. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the

seat belt is also being used by one of the vehi- cle's occupants. Always observe the instruc- tions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 102). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat

R Rear seats

Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retrac- tor (/ page 55). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 51).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that

the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an extended seat belt extender while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt does not sit correctly on the body, it cannot perform its intended protective function. # Always ensure that the seat belt

extender is retracted while the vehicle is in motion.

If the seat belt extender does not retract automat- ically, it can be retracted manually. To do so, press the seat belt extender back as far as it will go before starting the vehicle. Pressing the seat belt extender back into place requires force.

38 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 5 (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi- tional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 5

(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys- tem.

& WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckles

If seat belt buckles are blocked and cannot be moved downwards, the function of the Emer- gency Tensioning Devices is impaired. The seat belts may no longer perform their intended protective function. # Always ensure that the seat belt buckles

are not blocked.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modi ed seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the fol- lowing situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi-

ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirty R Modi cations have been made to the

Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modi ed Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as inten- ded. # Never modify the seat belt system, for

example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undam- aged, not worn and clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately a er an accident at a quali- ed specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- ing Devices

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic

Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi- ately replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident.

Occupant safety 39

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt

is fully retracted.

Extending/retracting the seat belt extender

When the door is closed, the seat belt extender extends.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The seat belt extender button is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles. You can also extend the seat-belt extender by using the seat-belt extender button in the center console.

# Switch on the ignition. # Press the seat belt extender button.

The seat belt extender extends. The seat belt extender retracts again in the follow- ing cases: R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat

belt buckle R The seat belt tongue is not engaged in the

seat belt buckle within 60 seconds If you press the seat belt extender but- ton again in this case, the seat belt extender will extend again. R The respective door is opened R You fold the seat backrest forwards R Nobody is sitting in the front passenger seat

If you press the seat belt extender but- ton again in this case, the seat belt extender will no longer extend.

The seat belt extender must always be retracted while the vehicle is in motion.

Fastening seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can- not be pulled out any further.

# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the corre- sponding seat.

40 Occupant safety

% A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 37).

* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled

When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa- rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emer- gency Tensioning Device. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

% Observe the notes on storage areas (/ page 102). Information on installing a child restraint sys- tem and on children traveling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 54).

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: A er a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjust- ment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 41).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment.

Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt

buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger

The seat belt warning lamp in the Instru- ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu- pants must wear their seat belts correctly. The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h)

and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their

seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Occupant safety 41

Airbags Overview of airbags

1 Driver's knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Front passenger knee airbag 5 Head airbag 6 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head

and ribcage R Head airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat

occupants

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co- driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 60). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.

Information on automatic front passenger airbag shuto The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air- bag is correct (/ page 46).

* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front

passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat

belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Store objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

42 Occupant safety

Depending on the detected accident situation, the head airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protective capacity of the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection o ered by a cor- rectly fastened seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protec- tive function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant

women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.

R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no

objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat

correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa- tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 87). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering

wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when

the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may

otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet on

the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe

the additional notes (/ page 51). R Always store and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air- bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occu- pant must always make sure of the following in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. R There are no objects between the seat, door

and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile

navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air-

Occupant safety 43

bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile

objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limitations of the protection provided by airbags

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca- tions to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and

do not a x objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury if the cover of the head airbag is damaged

If the cover of a head airbag is damaged, the head airbag may no longer function as inten- ded and may even cause additional injuries if deployed. In particular, the cover of the head airbag can be damaged by people sitting on it or by heavy objects. # Before commencing your journey, make

sure that the head airbag covers are undamaged. Have a damaged head air- bag cover replaced immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Never sit on the cover of the head air- bag.

# Do not place heavy objects on the cover of the head airbag.

The head airbags are integrated into the beltline of the doors (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that

have been approved for the correspond- ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modi cations or incorrect work per- formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the

doors. # Always have work on the doors or door

trim carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

44 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protec- tion. # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed

specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the co-

driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,

make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 60). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 60). A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 37). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their

back against the seat backrest.

R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi- ble.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be dis- abled by mistake, for example, in the following sit- uations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by

supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that

their weight is raised from the seat surface.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sit- ting too close to the cockpit.

Occupant safety 45

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classi cation of the person in the front

passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly. # Both before and during the journey,

ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classi- cation of the person or child restraint system on

the front passenger seat takes place a er the front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 46).

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps

Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shut- o When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per- formed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simulta- neously.

The status of the front passenger airbag is dis- played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps a er the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may

deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger

airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa-

bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger air- bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be o . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag

46 Occupant safety

shuto checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta- tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. A er installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

# Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI- OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 60). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. A er installing a forward-facing child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit contin- uously or be o . Always observe the following information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with parts of the vehi-

cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o # Always move the front passenger seat as

far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary,

Occupant safety 47

adjust the front passenger seat accord- ingly.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 60). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o , depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat.

R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains o , depending on the classi cation. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is o : move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classi cation of the person in the front

passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor-

rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible.

Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger

seat (/ page 60)

48 Occupant safety

Roll bar

& DANGER Risk of injury or death due to a malfunction of the roll bars

The roll bars cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. # Have the roll bars checked immediately

at a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury when the roll bars are triggered

There is a risk of injury. Always make sure that there is nothing in the sweep behind the rear head restraints.

& WARNING Danger of injury or death due to obstructed roll bars

If you leave objects or items of clothing on the covers of the roll bars, the roll bars cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, the objects may endanger vehi- cle occupants when the roll bars extend.

# Always make sure that the there is noth- ing in the sweep of the roll bars.

# Always stow and secure objects in the vehicle correctly.

The roll bars are under the covers behind the rear head restraints. The roll bars are triggered when danger of the vehicle rolling over is detected. Once the roll bars have been triggered, you can no longer close a so top that is open. In this case, consult the next quali ed specialist work- shop.

PRE-SAFE system Function of PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv- ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas- ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas- ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with memory function: Moving the

front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increasing the

air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multime-

dia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.

Occupant safety 49

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,

move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, par- ticularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre- emptive measures to protect the vehicle occu-

pants. These measures cannot necessarily pre- vent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is

stationary. This brake application is canceled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol- lowing situations: R When backing up

The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations: R Whilst driving

or R When entering or exiting a parking space while

using Active Parking Assist

Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the

speci c situation. In this way you can recog- nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil- dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 51).

Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri- ous consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the fol- lowing information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint sys-

tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropriate

to the age, weight and size of the child.

50 Occupant safety

R The vehicle seat must be suitable for installing a child restraint system.

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat

belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Observe standards for child restraint systems All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213

and 210.2

Con rmation that the child restraint system com- plies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This con rmation can also be found in the instal- lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages

Installing an LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehi- cle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 55). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a

Occupant safety 51

height where a three-point seat belt can be fas- tened properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces back- wards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer- vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

# Be sure to comply with the manufactur- er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys- tem.

# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants.

# Always install child restraint systems cor- rectly, even when not in use.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system on the right and le rear seats (/ page 55).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 58).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 60). Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 60). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour-

52 Occupant safety

ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 46).

R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- rior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca- tions to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer func- tion properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only a x accessories which have been

specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint sys- tems

Child restraint systems or their retaining sys- tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child

restraint systems that have been dam- aged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could su er burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint

system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Cover the child restraint system with a

blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been

exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Occupant safety 53

Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particu-

lar, unattended in the vehicle.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for instal- ling a child restraint system

Le /right rear seat Preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing

system Also secure Top Tether if present

(/ page 57).

Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 57).

Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,

ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 46). R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag

shuto (/ page 45).

54 Occupant safety

Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor of the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord-

ance with the tra c conditions. # Activate the special seat belt retractor

again and correctly secure the child restraint system.

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Installing a child restraint system # When installing a child restraint system,

always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the infor- mation in this Operator's Manual.

# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.

# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activa- ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.

# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.

Deactivating the special seat belt retractor # Press the release button of the seat belt

buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to

the seat belt outlet.

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the le and right rear seats

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the le and right rear seats

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to pro- tect as intended and could cause addi- tional injury.

Occupant safety 55

R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee- ded.

Too much load may be placed on the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint system

together weigh more than the permissi- ble gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R In the manufacturer's installation and operat-

ing instructions for the child restraint system used R On a label on the child restraint system, if

present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still com- plied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats

and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a baby car seat in weight group

0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight group II or III.

56 Occupant safety

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket

Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle. # Remove and stow away covers1. # Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system to both mounting brackets in the vehi- cle.

# A er removing the child seat, reattach covers 1.

Fastening a Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked a er Top Tether belts are installed

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no lon- ger be able to perform their intended protec- tive function. This may also cause additional injuries. # Always lock rear seat backrests a er

installing Top Tether belts. # Observe the lock veri cation indicator.

If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster. If the child restraint system is equipped

with a Top Tether belt:

Occupant safety 57

The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (le and right rear seats) or the seat belt (all rear seats) and the vehicle.

# Place the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether on the rear seat. It is essential to comply with the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

# Fold the rear seat backrest forward (/ page 105).

# Attach Top Tether hook2 to Top Tether anchorage1.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back (/ page 106).

# Make sure that Top Tether belt3 is not twis- ted and the rear seat backrest is locked in place.

# Secure the child restraint system with LATCH- type (ISOFIX) (/ page 55).

# Tension Top Tether belt3 from the trunk. # Make sure that there is su cient seat belt

strap for pulling tight. # It is essential to comply with the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-

58 Occupant safety

tect as intended and could cause addi- tional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster.

When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 57).

O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward- facing child restraint system on a rear seat:

adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

O When using a weight category I forward- facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong

direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

% Before opening or closing the so top, child restraint systems in weight category II or III must be removed or the head restraints of the child restraint systems must be moved to the lowest position. In this case, let the child get out before opening or closing the so top.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seatbelt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 55).

Occupant safety 59

# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet.

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

# Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI- OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the speci c instructions for the rear- ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys- tems (/ page 60). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 46). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is ena- bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 60).

O Observe the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation and operating instructions.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the

60 Occupant safety

maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

The seat belt on the front passenger side is equip- ped with a special seatbelt retractor. When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 55).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could a ect the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shut- o . # Do not place any objects between the

seat surface and the child restraint sys- tem.

# Always make sure that the child restraint system is correctly installed.

# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.

# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- ment.

# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.

# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let.

# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Occupant safety 61

Child safety locks

Activating and deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particu-

lar, unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.

R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are traveling in the vehi- cle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Child safety locks are available for the side win- dows in the rear passenger compartment.

62 Occupant safety

# To activate/deactivate: press button2. Opening/closing the side window in the rear passenger compartment is possible: R Indicator lamp1 is lit: via the switch on

the driver's door R Indicator lamp1 is o : via the switch on

the corresponding rear door or driver's door

Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals le unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press but- tons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example R Switch systems on or o and endanger

other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat-

tended. # Always correctly secure animals while

driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier.

Occupant safety 63

SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic elds

# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic elds.

Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp

3 Unlocks 4 Opens the trunk lid 5 Panic alarm

% If indicator lamp2 does not light up a er pressing the or button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 66). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel ller ap R Trunk lid

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Anti- the protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec- tronic devices or metal objects. This can a ect the SmartKey's functionality.

64 Opening and closing

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking veri - cation signal

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.

Arming/disarming the panic alarm

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched o .

# To activate: press button1 for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.

# To deactivate: brie y press button1 again. or # Press the start/stop button.

A SmartKey belonging to the vehicle must be detected in the vehicle.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap # To switch between settings: press the

and buttons simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds until the indicator lamp ashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel ller ap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the

inner surface of the door handle on the driv- er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel ller ap are unlocked.

Deactivating the function of the SmartKey

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the SmartKey, the KEYLESS-GO func- tions are also deactivated. Access or drive author- ization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular SmartKey. Activate the func- tion of the SmartKey so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the Smart- Key to reduce the energy consumption of the SmartKey if you do not use the vehicle or a Smart- Key for an extended period of time. # To deactivate: press the button on the

SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp ashes twice brie y and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the SmartKey. % When the vehicle is started with the SmartKey

in the marked space of the center console, the function of the SmartKey is automatically activated (/ page 138).

Opening and closing 65

Removing/inserting the emergency key

Removing the emergency key

# Press release button1. Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.

# Pull out emergency key2 until it engages in the intermediate position.

# Press release button1 again and fully remove emergency key2.

Inserting the emergency key # Press release button1. # Insert emergency key2 to the intermediate

position or fully until it engages.

% You can use the intermediate position of emergency key2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.

Replacing the SmartKey battery

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swal- lowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-

dren. # If the cap and/or the battery compart-

ment does not close securely, do not use the SmartKey any longer and keep out of the reach of children.

# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist work- shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 66).

66 Opening and closing

# Press release knob2 down fully and slide cover1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Fold out cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.

# Remove battery compartment3 and take out the discharged battery.

# Insert the new battery into battery compart- ment3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this.

# Push in battery compartment3. # Re-attach cover1 and push it until it

engages.

Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp

(/ page 64). # Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary

(/ page 66). # Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock

(/ page 70). # Have the SmartKey checked at a quali ed spe-

cialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the SmartKey is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)

R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers

# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a quali ed

specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock

replaced as well.

Opening and closing 67

Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# Pull door handle2. Locking pin1 pops up when the door is unlocked.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

# To unlock: press button1. # To lock: press button2. % The buttons are also on the front passenger

door. This does not lock or unlock the fuel ller ap.

The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the Smart-

Key R If you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO

Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the

vehicle does not exceed 3 (1 m). R The driver's door and the door on which the

door handle is used are closed.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid

R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the SmartKey

in these situations. or

68 Opening and closing

# Make sure that the SmartKey is at a min- imum distance of 10 (3 m) away from the vehicle.

Observe the notes: R On washing the vehicle in a car wash

(/ page 273) R On using a high pressure cleaner

(/ page 274)

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.

# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface1 or2.

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface2 until the closing process has been completed.

% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 84).

If you open the trunk lid from outside, it is auto- matically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the SmartKey has been deacti-

vated. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Activate the function of the SmartKey

(/ page 65).

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 64).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 66).

# Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock

(/ page 70). # Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a

quali ed specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers

# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

Opening and closing 69

Activating/deactivating the automatic locking fea- ture

The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehi- cle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

# To activate: press and hold button2 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

# To deactivate: press and hold button1 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow-started or

pushed R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-

mometer

Power closing function

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically

Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are

in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be

canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.

If you push the door into the lock to the rst detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using

the emergency key, rst press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key.

70 Opening and closing

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 66). # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go

into opening1 in the cover. # Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as

straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

# Release the door handle.

# To unlock: turn the emergency key counter- clockwise to position 1.

# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin- der until it engages and is seated rmly.

Trunk Opening the trunk lid

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the vehicle is running, espe- cially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before

opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

* NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta- cles above the vehicle

The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is su -

cient clearance above the trunk lid.

# With the trunk lid unlocked, press the top of the Mercedes star.

Opening and closing 71

% To open, pull on the folded-out Mercedes star when the rear view camera is activated.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 73).

# Pull remote operating switch1 until the trunk lid opens.

or

# Press and hold the p button on the Smart- Key.

Closing the trunk lid

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi- cle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the trunk lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detected in

the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be locked and will pop open again. Note that the trunk lid will not be locked if the fol- lowing situation occurs: R You have locked the vehicle and close the

trunk lid while a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is

not detected outside the vehicle.

Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one

SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.

# To close the trunk lid: pull the trunk lid down- wards using the handle recess and push it closed.

72 Opening and closing

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open the trunk lid by performing a kicking movement under the bumper. Observe the notes when opening the trunk lid (/ page 71).

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kick-

ing movement within the detection range of the sensors.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid

R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the SmartKey

in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a min-

imum distance of 10 (3 m) away from the vehicle.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing rmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the

vehicle while performing the kicking move- ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper

while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too

slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the

vehicle and back again.

Opening and closing 73

1 Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or

snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros-

thetic leg.

The trunk lid could be opened unintentionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sen-

sor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi-

cle, e.g. the fuel pump hose or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are

pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over

the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly.

Deactivate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 65) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.

Switching separate trunk locking on or o

If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate locking is activated, the trunk will remain locked.

# To switch on: slide the switch to position 1. # To switch o : slide the switch to position 2. % If an accident has been detected, the trunk

will unlock even if separate locking is switched on.

74 Opening and closing

Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release

Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and

charged.

# Press emergency release button1 brie y.

So top Opening or closing the so top using the so -top switch

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the so top lowering unexpectedly

If you do not fully open/close the so top, the so -top hydraulics will depressurize a er a short time. # Always fully open or close the so top.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening or closing the so top

Parts of the body could become trapped. # Ensure that there are no body parts in

the immediate vicinity of moving parts during opening and closing.

# Stop the operation immediately if some- body becomes trapped. The opening/ closing process will be stopped.

* NOTE Possible damage to the so top dur- ing opening or closing

The so top may be damaged while being opened or closed. # Ensure that su cient clearance is availa-

ble above the so top. # Load the trunk only below the level of

the trunk partition so that this is not pushed upwards.

# Make sure that the trunk lid is closed. # If the fabric is dirty, wet or icy, do not

open the so top. # When the vehicle is being transported

(e.g. on a motorail), do not open or close the so top.

# Make sure that no child seats are instal- led on the rear bench seat and that no other objects (e.g. behind the rear seats) interfere with the movement of the so top above the dash support.

Opening and closing 75

* NOTE Damage to the so top due to heavy objects

Heavy, pointed or sharp-edged objects placed on the so top may damage it. # Do not place any heavy objects on the

so top. # Do not sit on the so top.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends opening or closing the so top when the vehicle is stationary. To open or close the so top while you are driving, do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). To avoid interrupting the closing proc- ess while you are slightly exceeding this speed, do not drive at a speed greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). # Make sure that the trunk partition is closed. # Close the trunk lid. # Switch on the vehicle. # Keep the brake pedal depressed when the

vehicle is stationary.

# To open: pull and hold so -top switch1 until the so top is fully open. The instrument display will show the opening process of the so top.

# To close: press and hold so -top switch1 until the so top is fully closed. The instrument display will show the closing process of the so top.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to exces- sive speed during the so top opening or closing procedure

If the vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h), the so top will stop during the opening or closing procedure. # Reduce the vehicle speed to below

37 mph (60 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Operate the so -top switch again to open or close the so top fully.

The current procedure will be stopped at a speed greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). The message is shown on the instrument display. # Reduce your speed and press or pull so -top

switch1 again.

If the so top does not close fully because of strong headwinds, drive more slowly or stop.

76 Opening and closing

Relocking the so top

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the so top lowering unexpectedly

If you do not fully open/close the so top, the so -top hydraulics will depressurize a er a short time. # Always fully open or close the so top.

If the so top has not been completely locked, the instrument display will show the message Open/ Close Soft Top Completely . In addition, you will hear a warning tone for up to ten seconds while driving. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance

with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that the vehicle is switched on. # Fully close the so top using the so -top

switch.

Opening or closing the trunk partition

The trunk partition covers luggage or loads in the trunk.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be equipped with a manual or automatic trunk parti- tion. The so top can be opened only when the manual trunk partition is closed. In vehicles with an automatic trunk partition, this will automatically close when the so top is opened.

* NOTE Damage to the so top or loads due to long objects

The so top or the load may be damaged when the so top is open. # Do not place objects that are too long in

or behind the side parcel nets when the trunk partition is open.

# Make sure that the load does not push the trunk partition upwards.

# Vehicles with a manual trunk partition: to open, push trunk partition2 in the opposite direction to the arrow and into its upper end position using the handle.

# Vehicles with a manual trunk partition: to close, pull trunk partition2 in the direction of the arrow by the handle until it rests on the sides of the trunk.

Opening and closing 77

# Vehicles with an automatic trunk partition: press button1. Trunk partition2 will open or close automati- cally.

% In the event of a system failure, close auto- matic trunk partition2 manually.

Activating or deactivating AIRCAP

AIRCAP reduces the dra in the front and rear passenger compartment when you are driving with the so top open. Particularly turbulent air can reduce the e ect of AIRCAP. This can occur when you are driving behind another vehicle or if there is a crosswind, for example. AIRCAP consists of the following components: R A wind de ector above the windshield R A wind screen behind the two rear seat head

restraints

When AIRCAP is activated, the wind de ector and the wind screen will extend simultaneously.

AIRCAP can be activated or deactivated at speeds of up to approximately 100 mph (160 km/h).

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when retracting AIRCAP

Somebody could become trapped. # Make sure that nobody holds on to the

upper frame of the windshield or touches the wind de ector or wind screen.

# Switch on the vehicle. # To activate: pull button1.

AIRCAP will extend and the indicator lamp on button1 will light up.

# To deactivate: press button1. AIRCAP will retract and the indicator lamp on button1 will go out.

78 Opening and closing

If the vehicle is parked with the so top open and the vehicle is switched o , AIRCAP will retract automatically. When you restart the vehicle a er having been parked, AIRCAP will extend again automatically.

Problems with the so top

The so top will not open or close. Possible causes: R The vehicle is not switched on. # Make sure that the vehicle is switched on. R The brake pedal was not depressed with the

vehicle stationary. # Depress the brake pedal. R The trunk partition is not closed. # Remove overhanging luggage and close the

trunk partition. R The trunk lid is open. # Close the trunk lid (/ page 72).

R The so top has been opened and closed sev- eral times in a row. The so top drive has been switched o automatically and will be available again a er approximately ten minutes.

# Repeat the opening or closing procedure a er approximately ten minutes. R You are driving at a speed greater than

37 mph (60 km/h). # Reduce your speed to below 37 mph

(60 km/h). R The so top mechanical components or con-

trol system are defective. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Installing and removing the folding wind screen

& WARNING Risk of accident when using the wind screen in poor visibility conditions

The wind screen impairs your rear view.

# If visibility is impaired, fold the wind screen in or do not use it.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to an incorrectly installed wind screen

The wind screen may become loose while you are driving and endanger other road users. # Install the wind screen as described. # Do not place any objects on the installed

wind screen.

* NOTE The wind screen can be damaged if installed when the so top is closed

The vehicle interior or the wind screen can be damaged if installed when the so top closed. # To install, open the so top.

* NOTE Damage to the wind screen due to objects placed on it

Objects placed on top of the installed wind screen may damage it.

Opening and closing 79

# Do not place any objects on the installed wind screen.

* NOTE Damage to the wind screen due to collision with seat backrests

The wind screen may collide with the front seat backrests when installed. # Adjust the backrest positions of the front

seats.

The folding wind screen is installed over the rear seats to protect against wind when you are driving with the so top open. Only the front seats can be occupied when the folding wind screen is instal- led. The bag containing the folding wind screen is attached to the through-loading feature behind the rear seats. If the through-loading feature is being used, loosen the bag's lashing strap and stow it in the trunk. Fasten the lashing strap to the luggage hook. You should preferably perform operations involv- ing the folding wind screen on the side of the vehicle facing away from tra c.

# Open all side windows and the so top.

# Open all side windows and the so top. # Fold the rear seats forward to remove the bag. # Remove the folding wind screen from the bag.

# Fold out folding wind screen1 as shown. # Fold out the two brackets2 on the le and

right.

80 Opening and closing

# Align brackets2 of folding wind screen1 with both rear xtures3 on the vehicle.

Perform the following steps in sequence on both sides of the vehicle:

* NOTE Damage to the side trim

If the following step is not performed, the side trim may be damaged.

# Before inserting the folding wind screen into the side xture, pull the handle in the direction of the arrow.

# Pull handle5 in the direction of the arrow. # Align folding wind screen1 with side xture 4 on the vehicle from above and insert.

# Push handle5 on folding wind screen1 back as far as it will go. Make sure that the red marking of the lock veri cation indicator is no longer visible. Folding wind screen1 is locked.

Follow the instructions in reverse order to remove the folding wind screen.

Opening and closing 81

Side windows Opening and closing the side windows

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- ing a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is

touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but-

ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the but- ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unatten- ded. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear

passenger compartment side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been

switched on.

1 Closes 2 Opens

The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. # To start automatic operation: press the W

button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.

82 Opening and closing

% Automatic operation for closing is available only for the front side windows.

When the vehicle is switched o , you can con- tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a door is opened.

All side windows can be opened or closed simul- taneously using button1.

# Switch on the vehicle. # To open: press and hold button1 to the

point of resistance. # To open fully: press and hold button1

beyond the point of resistance. # To close: pull and hold button1.

Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten- tiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no

body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react: R To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R During resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions. # During the closing process, make sure

that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- ing a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is

touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if some-

body becomes trapped.

Opening and closing 83

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening or closing the so top

Parts of the body could become trapped. # Ensure that there are no body parts in

the immediate vicinity of moving parts during opening and closing.

# Stop the operation immediately if some- body becomes trapped. The opening/ closing process will be stopped.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of

the vehicle. # Press and hold the button on the Smart-

Key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened when the

trunk partition is open. R The so top is opened when the trunk par-

tition is closed.

R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.

# To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.

# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from out- side)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience clos- ing

When the convenience closing feature is oper- ating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows. # When the convenience closing feature is

operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening or closing the so top

Parts of the body could become trapped. # Ensure that there are no body parts in

the immediate vicinity of moving parts during opening and closing.

# Stop the operation immediately if some- body becomes trapped. The opening/ closing process will be stopped.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of

the vehicle. # Press and hold the button on the Smart-

Key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The so top is closed.

The side windows are closed when the so top is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.

84 Opening and closing

# To continue convenience closing: press and hold the button again.

% Convenience closing also functions with KEY- LESS-GO (/ page 68).

Resolving problems with the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately a er it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the

button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the

window guide. # Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre-

sponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre-

sponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp

(/ page 64). # Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary

(/ page 66).

Anti-the protection Function of the immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart- Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid SmartKey has been le inside the vehicle.

Opening and closing 85

% In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicles battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-the alarm system)

Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the trunk lid is opened R When the hood is opened

The ATA system is armed automatically a er approximately ten seconds in the following situa- tions: R A er locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Indicator lamp1 ashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R A er unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R A er pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 138)

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call sys- tem is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 256).

% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-the alarm system is automatically deac- tivated to facilitate the next engine start.

Deactivating the ATA # Press the, or p button on the

SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the SmartKey

in the stowage compartment (/ page 138)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the Smart-

Key outside the vehicle.

86 Opening and closing

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the

driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel1, seat belt2 and driver's seat3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's

airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration. R You are sitting in an upright position. R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion.

R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly. R The back of your head is supported at eye

level by the center of the head restraint. R You can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent. R You can move your legs freely. R You can see all the displays on the instrument

cluster clearly. R You have a good overview of the tra c condi-

tions. R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body

and passes across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Seats and stowing 87

Seats Adjusting the front seat manually and electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched o .

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat

is engaged before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

88 Seats and stowing

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that

hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving o , make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive strain on the grab handle

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchor- age. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the

seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the co-

driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,

make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

Seats and stowing 89

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure

that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-a position # To adjust the seat fore-and-a position: li

lever3 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

Adjusting the front seat electrically

1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat cushion inclination 6 Seat fore-and-a position

90 Seats and stowing

# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 102).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Higher 2 So er 3 Lower 4 Firmer

# Use buttons1 to4 to adjust the contour of the backrest.

Head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints on the front seats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving o , make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Seats and stowing 91

# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob1 and push the

head restraint down.

# To move forwards: pull the head restraint for- wards.

# To move backwards: press release knob1 and push the head restraint backwards.

Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints

Removing

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for- wards slightly (/ page 105).

# Push release knob1 in the direction of the arrow and pull the head restraint up and out.

92 Seats and stowing

Installing # Insert the head restraint such that the notches

on the bar are on the le when viewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it

engages.

Con guring the seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort

Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settingsZ for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side Bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.

Setting the seat heating balance # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired

seat.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le

Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust- ment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driv-

er's seat is being adjusted using the mul- timedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- ately:

# a) Tap the warning message on the media display.

or # b) Press a memory position button or a

seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.

Requirements: R Adapting the driver's seat position to body

size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment

Switching automatic seat adjustment on/o When the active user pro le is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, outside mir- rors and seat contour will automatically be adap- ted to the driver. # Select On or Off.

Seats and stowing 93

% This setting is available only for individual user pro les. For the guest pro le, automatic seat adjustment cannot be switched on or o .

Adjusting the driver's seat position to body size The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat position on the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or

ft/in. # Set the size using the scale. # Select Start Positioning.

The driver's seat position will be adjusted to the body size that has been set.

% If the driver's seat position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be changed manually at any time via the but- tons. The exterior mirrors are not set via this func- tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches.

% You can also con gure these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user pro le. By synchronizing the pro les in the vehicle and

the Mercedes me connect pro les, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Fur- ther information about synchronizing user pro les .

Setting the easy entry and exit feature # Switch the function on or o . % If you use an individual user pro le and have

set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat to automatically move into the correct position .

Overview of massage programs

The following programs can be selected: R Relaxing Massage It starts by massaging the

back, beginning in the pelvic area. R Activating Massage Activating massage with

upward-moving massage waves. R Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. R Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing massage with

upward-moving massage waves. The program can promote slower, deeper respiration. This

can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.

Selecting the massage program for the front seats

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High

Intensity on or o .

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select for the desired seat. # Con rm the prompt.

Folding the front seat backrest forwards/back (vehicles with memory function)

If you fold the seat backrest forwards, the seat will move forwards with the EASY-ENTRY function.

94 Seats and stowing

This allows passengers to get into and out of the rear passenger compartment comfortably.

# To fold forward: pull seat release handle1 and fold the seat backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat will automatically move to the fore- most position.

# To fold back: swing the seat backrest back horizontally. If the seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. A warning tone will also sound. The seat will automatically move to the stored position.

Switching the seat heating on/o

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- ding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heat- ing is switched on

When the seat heating is switched on, over- heating may occur due to objects or docu- ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or documents

are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

Seats and stowing 95

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o .

% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches o .

Setting the panel heating

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armr- ests and the center console can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on or

o .

Switching the seat ventilation on/o

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

96 Seats and stowing

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched o .

Switching AIRSCARF on/o

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by the heating output from AIRSCARF being too high

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can ow from the outlet opening in the head restraints. # Turn the heating output down in good

time. # Maintain a suitable distance from the

outlet opening.

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

AIRSCARF uses heated air to warm the head and neck area of vehicle occupants. The warm air ows out of the vents in the head restraints. # Press button1 repeatedly until the desired

heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all the indicator lamps are o , AIRSCARF is switched o .

Seats and stowing 97

% When switching on, the blower will start up only a er a preheating phase lasting a few seconds. A er switching o , the blower will continue to run for a few seconds to cool down the heat- ing elements.

% If the vehicle battery voltage is too low, AIR- SCARF may switch o .

# Adjust the AIRSCARF vent (/ page 135).

Make sure that no objects are covering the air inlet grille on the back of the head restraints. Make sure that objects do not enter the air intakes and outlets in the head restraints.

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# To unlock: push release lever1 down as far as it will go.

# Adjust height2 and distance3 to the steering wheel.

98 Seats and stowing

Locking # Fold release lever1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering col-

umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height # Save the settings with the memory function

(/ page 102).

Switching the steering wheel heater on/o

Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been

switched on.

# Turn the lever in the direction of arrow1 or 2. If indicator lamp3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.

Seats and stowing 99

When you switch the vehicle o , the steering wheel heater will switch o .

Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process

is complete before driving o .

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in

the sweep of the steering wheel or driv- er's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the adjustment lever of the steer-

ing wheel. The adjustment process will be stopped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.

The adjustment process will be stopped. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles with memory function: You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the mem- ory function position switches.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu- larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driver's seat will move back in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle when the driver's

door is open. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is

switched o .

% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

100 Seats and stowing

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the following cases: R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on

when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is

switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch o the vehicle. R Vehicles with memory function: You call up the

seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with memory function: You save the

seat settings via the memory function.

Vehicles with memory function: Press one of the memory function position buttons to stop the adjustment process.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function.

Memory function Function of the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem- ory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the

driver's side when the vehicle is station- ary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func- tion

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the

memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust- ment switch immediately.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the mem- ory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

Seats and stowing 101

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the vehi- cle is switched o . Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display

Operating the memory function

Storing

# Set the desired position for all systems. # Brie y press theV memory button and

then press preset position button 4,T orU within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

# To call up: press or brie y hold preset position button 4,T orU. A er releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.

Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the vehicle is running, espe- cially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before

opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip

102 Seats and stowing

over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi- cle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shuto : Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger air- bag shuto (/ page 45).

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehi- cle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be ung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu- pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from tra c conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehicle

is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of

the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the

liquid is hot.

Seats and stowing 103

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart- ment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully

engaged.

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, ammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the

knob.

# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the

tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super- vise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or

the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the vehi- cle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and

distribute the load evenly.

Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place

heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 102). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling

away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

104 Seats and stowing

R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs; andA. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 148).

% For more information on stowage compart- ments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compartments

1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with

USB ports and stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player

3 Stowage compartment in the front center console with a USB port

4 Glove box

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

Rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest can fold forwards. R As a result, the vehicle occupant is

pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could cause additional inju- ries. R Objects or loads in the trunk cannot be

restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the

rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

You can fold the two seat backrests forward sepa- rately.

Seats and stowing 105

# Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one section of the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision.

# If necessary, fully insert the head restraints in the rear seat backrest.

# Pull switch1.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for- wards.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat back- rest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-

ped when folding back the seat backrest.

# Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one part of the seat backrest in the rear passenger compartment is folded back, the corresponding front seat will automatically return to the most recent original position.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest1 back until it engages. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 102).

106 Seats and stowing

1 Tie-down eyes

Vehicles with a wind screen: there is an additional tie-down eye behind the rear bench seat backr- ests. To access this, the seat backrests must be folded down (/ page 105).

Overview of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be ung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag

hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile

objects on the bag hooks.

Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 2.2 lbs (1 kg) and do not attach any goods to them. 1 Bag hook

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 102).

Seats and stowing 107

Attaching the parcel net

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

# Fold up the tie-down eyes. # Hook parcel net1 into the front and rear tie-

down eyes.

Sockets Using the 12 V socket

Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of

180 W (15 A).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console. In addition, depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console.

Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console

108 Seats and stowing

# Brie y press the trim element of the cover on the front. The cover opens in the direction of the arrow.

# Li up cap1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compart- ment open.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment: R In the front storage compartment R In the storage compartment under the front

armrest R In the rear center console R In the storage compartment in the rear arm-

rest

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the storage compartment and the

number of USB ports in the rear center con- sole may vary.

When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at USB ports using a suitable charging cable. When the vehicle is switched on, the devices can be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A).

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and con- nection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart- ment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of re from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a re hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place

any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.

Seats and stowing 109

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- ing them in the mobile phone storage compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone stor- age compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic elds. # Do not place credit cards, data storage

devices, ski passes or other objects sen- sitive to electromagnetic elds in the mobile phone storage compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow- age compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be dam- aged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile

phone stowage compartment.

R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module.

R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the ignition is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be

charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest at in

the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the

charging process. The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile phone storage compart- ment when the air conditioning system is switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone storage compartment is highest when the controller in the glove box is closed. R To ensure more e cient charging and connec-

tion with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. R When charging, the mat should be used if pos-

sible.

Charging a mobile phone wirelessly

Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless

charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com.

# Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged.

110 Seats and stowing

Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the central display.

% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Installing and removing the oor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.

# To install: press studs1 onto holders2. # To remove: pull the oor mat o holders2.

Seats and stowing 111

Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and tra c situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

1 W Le -hand standing lights 2 X Right-hand standing lights 3 T Parking lights and license plate lamp 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light

switch position)

5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o

When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using su cient

lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X

or le W parking light.

If the battery is insu ciently charged, the stand- ing lights or parking lights will be switched o automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

112 Light and visibility

The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch o automatically when the driv- er's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

(/ page 120).

Automatic driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the parking lamps, low beam and daytime running lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ambi- ent light.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched o in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to , the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visi- bility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to

L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog lights on or o

Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or posi-

tion. # Press the R button.

Please observe the country-speci c laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam asher 4 Turn signal light, le # Use the combination switch to activate the

desired function.

Light and visibility 113

Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or

position. # Push the combination switch beyond the point

of resistance in the direction of arrow1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva- ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.

Switching o high beam # Move the combination switch back to its start-

ing position.

High-beam asher # Pull the combination switch in the direction of

arrow3.

Turn signal light # To indicate brie y: push the combination

switch brie y to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. The corresponding turn signal light will ash three times.

# To indicate continuously: push the combina- tion switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the

driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand

but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may acti- vate automatically.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

# Press button1. The hazard warning lights will switch on automati- cally if: R The airbag has been deployed.

114 Light and visibility

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

Intelligent Light System function (Canada) The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide exten- ded functions for improved illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 115) R Cornering light (/ page 115) R Highway mode (/ page 116) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 116) R Bad weather light (/ page 116) R City lighting (/ page 116)

The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

R The headlamps follow the steering move- ments. R Relevant areas are better illuminated during a

journey.

The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

Cornering light function

The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc- tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the

turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and

43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned

Light and visibility 115

Roundabout and intersection function: the corner- ing light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS posi- tion. It will remain active until a er the vehicle has le the roundabout or the intersection.

Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and bright- ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

The function will be active if a highway journey is detected by means of: R The vehicle's speed R The multifunction camera R The navigation system

The function is not active in the following cases: R At speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h)

Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces self- blinding and improves the illumination of the edge of the road.

The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when

the rear fog light is switched on.

The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 62 mph

(100 km/h) are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched o .

Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces re ections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are blinded less as a result.

The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o (Canada)

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.

116 Light and visibility

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Intelligent Light System # Switch the function on or o .

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- tive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be

activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c con-

ditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will switch on automatically.

Light and visibility 117

The high beam will switch o automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is su cient

% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/o

Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-

tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument dis- play.

Switching o # Switch o the high beam using the combina-

tion switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada)

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- tive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c con-

ditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c condi- tions.

118 Light and visibility

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam

ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright- ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not blind them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is su cient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will

be switched o automatically.

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial

high beam will switch on automatically.

At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h): R If no other road users are detected on a

straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial

high beam will switch on automatically.

R If highly re ective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched o auto- matically.

% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/o (Canada)

Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-

tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automati- cally in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument display.

Switching o # Switch o the high beam using the combina-

tion switch.

Light and visibility 119

Switching the daytime running lamps on/o

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Daytime Run. Lights # Switch the function on or o .

Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time

Requirements: R The light switch is in the position.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-o delay time.

When the vehicle engine is switched o , the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Switching the surround lighting on/o

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior light- ing lights up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur- round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting

# 1u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o

# 2p Switches the front right reading lamp on/o

# 3| Switches automatic interior lighting control on/o

# 4c Switches the front interior lighting on/o

# 5p Switches the front le reading lamp on/o

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Lighting

Setting the color # Select Color. # Set the desired color.

Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.

120 Light and visibility

Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Switch the function on or o . or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.

Activating multi-color lighting # Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination.

Activating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation.

The chosen color combination will change at prede ned intervals.

Activating welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome.

When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi- ent lighting sequence will run.

Activating dependency on air conditioning set- tings # Select Color. # Select Climate.

If changes are made to the temperature set- ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change brie y.

Switching the interior lighting switch-o delay time on/o

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-o delay time on or o .

When this function is active, the interior light- ing lights up for a short time a er the vehicle is locked.

Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/o

1 g Windshield wipers o 2 Intermittent wiping, normal 3 Intermittent wiping, frequent 4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

Light and visibility 121

# Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position 1 - 5.

# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R Single wipe R Wiping with washer uid

% Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 273).

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windshield wipers

and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement posi- tion # Switch the vehicle on and then o again

immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the

button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 121). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 as far as it will go.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow4.

122 Light and visibility

Installing the wiper blades

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- rectly.

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windshield.

# Switch on the vehicle. # Press the button on the combination

switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions.

# Switch o the vehicle. % Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-

larly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Maintenance display The maintenance display is available only with standard windshield wipers.

# Remove protective lm1 from the mainte- nance displays on the tips of the newly instal- led wiper blades.

When the color of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades. % The duration until the color changes varies

depending on the usage conditions.

Light and visibility 123

Replacing the windshield wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement posi- tion # Switch the vehicle on and then o again

immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the

button on the combination switch for approximately 3 seconds (/ page 121). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

# To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: raise the wiper arm away from the windshield and hold it with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc- tion of arrow1 beyond the point of resist- ance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.

# To remove the wiper blade: press release knob 2, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow3 and remove.

Installing the wiper blades

# Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 until release knob 2 engages.

124 Light and visibility

# Press the wiper blade beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow3 on the wiper arm. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again.

# Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. # Switch on the vehicle. # Press the button on the combination

switch (/ page 121). The wiper arms will return to their original positions.

% Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- larly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror

The outside mirror on the front passenger side re ects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul-

der to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you.

Light and visibility 125

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

# Brie y press button1.

Resetting the outside mirrors % If the battery has been disconnected or com-

pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

# Brie y press button1.

Adjusting the outside mirrors # Press button3 or4 to select the outside

mirror to be adjusted. # Press button2 to adjust the position of the

mirror glass.

Engaging the outside mirrors # Vehicles without electrically folding outside

mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.

# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir- rors: press and hold button1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poison- ing due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- matic anti-glare mirror breaks.

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and cau- ses irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electrolyte,

observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte

from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with

your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, imme-

diately rinse your mouth out thor- oughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing

which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

126 Light and visibility

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti- glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sen- sor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The vehicle is switched o . R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 127). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shi the transmission to another transmis-

sion position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than

9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on

the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button2.

# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into

the desired parking position using button1.

Light and visibility 127

Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror

using button2. # Engage reverse gear.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror fold- ing function

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or o .

128 Light and visibility

Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control

An interior air lter in combination with the pre l- ter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air ltration work cor- rectly. Use lters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Overview of the air conditioning control panel

The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate con- trol with/without stationary heater (example) 1 w Sets the temperature, le 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3H Sets the air ow or switches o climate

control 4 Sets climate control to automatic mode

(/ page 131) 5 Defrosts the windshield

6 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone auto- matic climate control (without stationary heater): t calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone auto- matic climate control (with stationary heater, plug-in hybrid) or control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control (with/without sta- tionary heater, plug-in hybrid):! calls up the air conditioning menu, switches residual heat on/o (/ page 132)

7 Switches the rear window heater on/o 8 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone auto-

matic climate control without stationary heater:0 switches synchronization on/o (/ page 131) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone auto- matic climate control without stationary heater: switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 130) Vehicles with a stationary heater: & switches the stationary heater on/o Plug-in hybrid: & activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control"

Climate control 129

9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o (/ page 132)

A Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone auto- matic climate control: switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 130) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone auto- matic climate control: _ adjusts the air distribution, right

B w Sets the temperature, right

Rear operating unit in vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

1 Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 Sets the temperature

Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/o # To switch on: set the air ow to level 1 or

higher using theH button. # To switch o : set the air ow to level 0 using

theH button.

If climate control is switched o , the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control o only brie y.

Switching the A/C function on/o using the air conditioning control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Press the button.

Switch o the A/C function only brie y; other- wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction.

Calling up the air conditioning menu

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the

lower edge of the media display.

130 Climate control

Calling up the air-conditioning menu using the button on the climate control panel # Press the! button on the climate control

panel.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Call up the air-conditioning menu

(/ page 130). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select A/C.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is con- trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the button. # To switch to manual mode: press theH or

_ button.

Climate style

Climate style function The following climate styles are available in auto- matic mode: R FOCUS: high air ow, slightly cooler setting R MEDIUM: medium air ow, standard setting R DIFFUSE: low air ow, slightly warmer and

dra -free setting

Setting the climate style # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 130). # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of

Seats. # Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu. # Select a climate style.

Setting the air distribution # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 130). # Select a row of seats.

# To set the air distribution: select , P or O.

# Set the air ow. % Several air distribution options can be selec-

ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously. The climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the rst seat row.

Activating/deactivating the climate control syn- chronization function via the air conditioning con- trol panel

Climate control can be set centrally using the syn- chronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the0 button.

The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate control zones are changed.

Climate control 131

Activating/deactivating the climate control syn- chronization function via the multimedia system

Climate control can be set centrally using the syn- chronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 130). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC.

Removing condensation from the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the

button.

Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/o # Press the g button.

The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode a er a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the

windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only brie y.

Switching the residual heat on or o

Requirements: R The vehicle is parked.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approx- imately 30 minutes. # To switch on: press the! button.

Residual heat is switched o automatically.

Activating/deactivating ionization

Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor- less. # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 130). # Select Air Quality. # Select IONIZATION.

Fragrance system

Setting the fragrance system

Requirements: R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed.

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra- grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a- con located in the glove box. # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 130). # Select Air Quality.

132 Climate control

# Select AIR FRESHENER. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is

reached.

Inserting or removing the acon of the fragrance system

& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per- fume

If children open the acon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con- tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid

perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with

your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.

# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full acons

Full acons must not be disposed of with household waste. #

Full acons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.

1 Cap 2 Flacon # To insert: slide the acon into the holder as far

as it will go. # To remove: pull out the acon.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety noti- ces on the perfume packaging.

Climate control 133

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume acon when it is empty and do not re ll it.

Re llable acon # Unscrew the cap of the empty acon. # Fill the acon with a maximum of 0.5 . oz.

(15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the acon.

Always re ll the empty re llable acon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the acon.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air vents.

# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a su cient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the air ow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the fol- lowing: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in

the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits

(/ page 273).

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the cen- ter and turn it to the le or right as far as it will go.

# To set the air ow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the le or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the cen- ter and turn it to the le or right as far as it will go.

# To set the air ow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the le or right.

134 Climate control

Adjusting the AIRSCARF vents

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by the heating output from AIRSCARF being too high

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can ow from the outlet opening in the head restraints. # Turn the heating output down in good

time. # Maintain a suitable distance from the

outlet opening.

* NOTE Damage caused to AIRSCARF by the use of protective covers

If a protective cover is placed over the front seat head restraints, the ow of air from the AIRSCARF vent is hindered. This can cause AIRSCARF to overheat and be damaged. # Do not use protective covers on head

restraints with AIRSCARF.

Make sure that no objects are covering the air inlet grille on the back of the head restraints.

# You can adjust the blower setting of AIR- SCARF vents1 using the AIRSCARF button (/ page 97).

# You can adjust the height of AIRSCARF vents 1 and the current of air by adjusting the height of the head restraints (/ page 91).

Climate control 135

Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognize dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends

on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R Emotion Start R AMG performance exhaust system R AMG ceramic high-performance composite

brake system R DRIFT MODE R AMG adaptive sport suspension system + R AMG steering-wheel buttons

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog-

nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed.

136 Driving and parking

# To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windshield wipers.

The power supply is switched o again if the fol- lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button1 twice more. # To switch on the vehicle: press button1

twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the instrument cluster.

The vehicle is switched o again if one of the fol- lowing conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes

and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button1 once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never run the vehicle and, if present, the

stationary heater indoors without su - cient ventilation.

& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are

no ammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog-

nized. # Shi the transmission to position j or i. # Depress the brake pedal and press button1

once. # If the vehicle does not start: switch o non-

essential consumers and press button1 once.

# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis- play message Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual appears in the instrument display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 138).

% You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To do this, press button1 for about three sec- onds or by pressing button1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 141).

Driving and parking 137

Observe any information regarding display mes- sages that can be displayed on the instrument display.

Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the instrument display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

# Make sure that marked space2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey1 from the key ring.

# Place SmartKey1 in marked space2. The vehicle will start a er a short time. When you remove SmartKey1 from marked space2, the vehicle can be driven. For fur- ther engine starts however, SmartKey1 must be located in marked space2 during the entire journey.

# Have SmartKey1 checked at a quali ed spe- cialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 and

leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle

using the start/stop button. % You can switch on the power supply or the

vehicle with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display mes- sages that can be displayed on the instrument display.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is su ciently full. R The starter battery is su ciently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting the journey You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smart- phone to charge the battery. The vehicle is auto- matically switched o a er ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the vehicle: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.

138 Driving and parking

R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is su ciently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin-

tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-the alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched

o . R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked.

R The windows and so top are closed. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone.

A er every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the SmartKey before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. You can switch o the vehicle at any time as fol- lows: R Via the smartphone app R By pressing the or button on the

SmartKey

% Further information can be found in the smartphone app.

Securing the vehicle against starting before carry- ing out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or

# Open a side window or the so top.

Breaking-in notes

To preserve the engine during the rst 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine

speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph

(140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive programA

or;. R Shi to the next highest gear at the very latest

when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R Do not shi down manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at

full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the

pressure point (kickdown). R Only increase the engine speed gradually and

accelerate the vehicle to full speed a er 1,000 miles (1,500 km).

Driving and parking 139

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,

the sensors adjust automatically while a cer- tain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered or a er repairs. Full sys- tem e ectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are

either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking e ect and grip a er several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking e ect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on optimized acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation con- ditions are ful lled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could

lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa- tion on ESP (/ page 166).

Pulling away with optimized acceleration

& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

When you use optimized acceleration, individ- ual wheels could spin and you could lose con- trol of the vehicle. If ESP is deactivated, there is a risk of skid- ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles

are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in (/ page 139). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway. R The engine and transmission are at normal

operating temperature.

* NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration

When pulling away with optimized accelera- tion, all components of the drivetrain are sub- jected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized

acceleration.

# Engage the h drive position (/ page 152). # Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead

position. # Select the sportiest available drive program B orC(/ page 149).

# Deactivate ESP (/ page 167). # Depress and hold the brake pedal rmly with

your le foot. # With your right foot, fully depress the acceler-

ator pedal.

140 Driving and parking

# A er no more than ve seconds, take your le foot quickly o the brake, but keep the accel- erator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera- tion.

# Switch on ESP once the acceleration proce- dure is complete.

Ending optimized acceleration # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP. % A er you pull away with optimized accelera-

tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimized acceleration values may be reached again only a er a few minutes.

Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers

There is a risk of an accident. # Always wear suitable footwear so that

you can operate the pedals safely.

& WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched o while driving

If you switch o the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may a ect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch o the vehicle while driv-

ing.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never run the vehicle and, if present, the

stationary heater indoors without su - cient ventilation.

Driving and parking 141

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci- dent due to shi ing down on slippery road surfaces

If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking e ect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shi down on slippery road surfa-

ces to increase the engine braking e ect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- ous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- cle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around

the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the stationary heater is run- ning.

# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the in uence of alcohol and drugs while driving

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can a ect your re exes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or

allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.

This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the

accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over-

revving range.

* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal

# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- ously whilst driving.

# To use the braking e ect of the engine, shi to a lower gear in good time.

142 Driving and parking

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi- ately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is mis- ring.

Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal

slightly. # Have the cause recti ed immediately at

a quali ed specialist workshop.

* NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips

The 12 V battery may not be su ciently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to

charge the battery.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head- room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged. # Observe the signposted headroom clear-

ance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the

permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu- pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and

towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Operator's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place

heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 102). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling

away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads.

Driving and parking 143

Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and

brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the

vehicle in front

To remove salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to

the tra c conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end

of the journey and when starting the next jour- ney

Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precipi- tation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts

R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 302).

Notes on driving through water on the road sur- face Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the

lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi-

cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to

the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

ECO start/stop function

ECO start/stop function % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop

function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display in the instrument display for this.

The engine is switched o automatically in the fol- lowing situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans-

mission position h or i. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys-

tem: you depress the brake pedal when travel- ing at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle

in front of you.

144 Driving and parking

R The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply

or engage reverse gear.

% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibi- tor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched o in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

The engine restarts automatically in the following cases: R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R You open or close the so top. R An automatic vehicle engine start is required. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys-

tem: - You release the brake pedal on a downhill

gradient and the vehicle does not roll.

- The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h).

ECO start/stop function symbols in the instru- ment display: R The symbol (green) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched o by the ECO start/stop function. R The symbol (yellow) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi- tions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the nor symbol appears

when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli- gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R Thes symbol appears: the ECO start/stop

function is deactivated or there is a malfunc- tion.

If the engine was switched o by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the instrument display:

Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not switch o the vehicle, it is automati- cally switched o a er three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

Driving and parking 145

# Press button1. If indicator lamp2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is activated.

% Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a di erent position in the center console.

ECO display function

The ECO display summarizes your driving charac- teristics from the start of the journey to its com- pletion and assists you in achieving the most eco- nomical driving style. You can in uence consumption by doing the fol- lowing: R Driving with particular care. R Following the gearshi recommendations.

The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will ll up when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration

The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration

The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will ll up completely at

the same time R The edges around all three segments will light

up

The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown on the cen- ter of display4. The range displayed does not indicate a xed reduction in consumption.

ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system)

ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec- ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(/ page 219).

146 Driving and parking

1 Event ahead 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot o the accelerator" prompt

Displayable route events1

The segments of distance display2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows: R A few segments light up: the event ahead is

near. R Many segments light up: the event ahead is

further away.

When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and gradient. The Foot off the Accelerator message3 appears in the Instru- ment Display. The rst segments in front of the vehicle will turn green. The remaining segments will initially stay white. If you take your foot o the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining seg- ments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recupera- tion will charge the battery. Recuperation will be adapted to the selected drive program. The event will be shown for a short time a er it has been passed. If there is no response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt, the segments will remain white.

If the event involves a vehicle in front, all seg- ments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt. For active ECO Assist in drive program;, symbol3 will appear on the instrument display and on the head-up display beside transmission position h. Symbol3 will also appear when the assistant display is not selected. If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs; andA.

System limits ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all

Driving and parking 147

times irrespective of whether the system inter- venes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illu-

mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,

direct sunlight or re ections. R If there is dirt on the windshield in the area of

the multifunction camera or the camera is fog- ged up, damaged or obscured. R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to

dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are obscured. R If the information on the navigation system's

digital map is incorrect or out of date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-

works or in adjacent lanes.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has di erent drive programs.

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multi- function display of the on-board computer. = Individual R Individual settings

B Sport+ R Particularly sporty driving R Emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering

and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style

R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road

C Sport R Continues to o er stability but with a sporty

setup R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving

style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry

road surface and a clear stretch of road

A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions

; Eco R Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions

148 Driving and parking

% The ESP settings in the drive programs; andA are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these driving programs, espe- cially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied.

Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive

- Engine and transmission management - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP

R Electric power steering

Selecting the drive program

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the instrument display.

Con guring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia sys- tem)

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I # Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category.

Switching the restoration display on or o # Switch Request at Start on or o .

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously

active settings deviate from the standard set- tings.

Function o : the next time the vehicle is started theA drive program is set automatically. The

Driving and parking 149

ECO start/stop function is activated automati- cally. % This function must be activated for each user

pro le separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user pro le.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Engine.

The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be ach-

ieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certi ed values within

the country-speci c guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country- speci c guidelines). In uencing variables that can in uence this are, for example: R Sea level R Fuel quality R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine

% The values displayed serve only as orienta- tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the media display may devi- ate from the actual values.

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Consumption.

The current and average fuel consumption is displayed.

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect gearshi ing

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi- tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position

h or k when the vehicle is at a stand- still, always depress the brake pedal rmly and do not accelerate at the same

time.

150 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach

of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the trans- mission position. The current transmission posi- tion is displayed in the instrument display.

j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT

SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of resistance.

Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT

SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of resistance.

% To shi into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the rst point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i even if the vehicle is switched o or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral

i when the vehicle is stationary. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch o the vehicle.

Driving and parking 151

% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the Smart- Key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i.

Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

(/ page 156). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle

comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but-

ton j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no trans- mission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission posi- tion display.

Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the stationary vehicle o in trans-

mission position h or k.

R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k.

% To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again.

Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT

SELECT lever down past the rst point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmis- sion position h, it shi s the gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the follow- ing factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed

Manual gearshi ing

When the automatic transmission is shi ed to position h, you can manually shi it with the steering wheel gearshi paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shi s to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshi paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shi the auto- matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting

The gears shi automatically when manual shi ing is deactivated.

152 Driving and parking

Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-

dle1 or2. Manual shi ing is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear.

% How long the manual shi ing stays activated is dependent on various factors. Manual shi ing can be automatically deactiva- ted in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission position h is

engaged again R Driving style

# To shi up: pull steering wheel gearshi pad- dle2.

# To shi down: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle1.

# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h.

Permanent setting: # Change to drive program=(/ page 149). # Select drive setting p (/ page 149).

Gearshi recommendation

The gearshi recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

# If gearshi recommendation1 appears next to the transmission position display, shi to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accelera-

tor pedal beyond the pressure point.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shi s up to the next gear when maxi- mum engine speed has been reached.

Glide mode function

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from

the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown

in green.

Driving and parking 153

R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the combustion engine can be switched o . All of the vehicle functions remain active.

Glide mode is activated if the following conditions are met: R Drive program; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep

uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake

pedal (except for light brake applications).

% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program=.

Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the con- ditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature

R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Tra c situation

Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insu cient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and tra c conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect

of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

Refueling Refueling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly ammable. # Fire, open ames, smoking and creating

sparks must be avoided. # Before refueling, switch o the vehicle

and, if installed, the stationary heater, and leave them switched o during refu- eling.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel.

154 Driving and parking

# Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of re and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor.

# Before you open the fuel ller cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition

engine fuel.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100

R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise

fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained

completely.

Driving and parking 155

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by over lled fuel tanks

# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz- zle switches o .

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz- zle switches o .

Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

Observe the notes on operating uids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number speci ed in the information label in the fuel ller ap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased.

1 Fuel ller ap 2 Bracket for fuel ller cap 3 Tire pressure table 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Stationary heater indication 6 Fuel type # Press on the back area of fuel ller ap1.

# Turn the fuel ller cap counter-clockwise and remove it.

# Insert fuel ller cap from above into bracket 2.

# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel.

# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o .

# Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

# Close fuel ller ap1.

Parking Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insu ciently secured vehi- cle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked su - ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

156 Driving and parking

# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to position j.

& WARNING Risk of re caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no ammable

material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass- land or harvested grain elds.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach

of children.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it roll- ing away

# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.

* NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control: The vehicle can lower because of tem- perature di erences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when

driving o , make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

Driving and parking 157

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake.

# Engage transmission position j in a station- ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 152).

# Switch o the vehicle by pressing button1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still oper-

ate the side windows and the so top for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

Programming buttons for the garage door opener

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Never run the vehicle and, if present, the stationary heater indoors without su - cient ventilation.

& WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door

When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, per- sons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. # Always make sure that nobody is within

the range of the garage door's move- ment.

Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing feature R Doors which conform to the current U.S.

safety standards

158 Driving and parking

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the

garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started.

% The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.

# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)

# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp4 ashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi- cator lamp ashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp4 continues to ash yellow.

# Point remote control6 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1,2 or3.

# Press and hold button5 of remote control 6 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp4 lights up green continu-

ously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp4 ashes green. Program-

ming was successful. Additionally, syn-

chronization of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out.

# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or ash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not

included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage

door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are

located outside the range of movement of the door.

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

Driving and parking 159

# Press previously programmed button1,2 or3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com- pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote

control6 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control6. # Hold remote control6 at various angles from

a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Hold remote control6 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear- view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button5 on remote control6 again before transmission ends.

# Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro- gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink Hotline on

1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https://

www.homelink.com/mercedes

Opening or closing the garage door

Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to

operate the door. # Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 until the

door opens or closes. # If indicator lamp4 ashes yellow a er

approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.

Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons1 and3.

Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp4 ashes green: release

buttons1 and3. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

160 Driving and parking

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach

of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the trans- mission is in position j and one of the following conditions is ful lled: R The vehicle is switched o . R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 162).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-

tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle

stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing

the vehicle to a standstill. R In addition, one of the following conditions

must be ful lled: - The vehicle is switched o . - The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

- There is a system malfunction. - The power supply is insu cient. - The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy

period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

% The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched o by the ECO start/stop function.

Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)

The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are ful lled: R The driver's door is closed. R The vehicle has been started. R The transmission is in position h or k and

you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk

lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be ful lled: - You shi from transmission position j.

or

Driving and parking 161

- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).

When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

# Push handle1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica- tor lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red F (USA) or ! (Can- ada) indicator lamp is lit continuously.

Releasing # Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle1.

The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica- tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Emergency braking # Press and hold handle1.

As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp ashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- still, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may su er damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam- aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a

quali ed specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use)

Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-opera- tion. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in

the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup-

ted.

162 Driving and parking

R The ATA (anti-the alarm system) is not availa- ble. R The function for detecting collisions on a

parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are ful lled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery in the following situa- tions: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be

extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby

Mode message appears in the media display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking the vehicle for an extended period)

Requirements: R The engine is switched o .

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes.

Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneuver- ing the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the

limitations regarding the safe use of these sys- tems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or tra c condi- tions.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cam- eras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

Driving and parking 163

1 Multifunction camera 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors 3 Front radar 4 Front camera 5 Corner radars 6 Ultrasonic sensors 7 Rear view camera

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restric- ted detection performance of vehicle sen- sors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or

cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.

# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 278). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate bracket, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras.

Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a quali ed specialist work- shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop. % The rear view camera can extend and retract

automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 165) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 166) R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

(/ page 166) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 167) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)

(/ page 168)

164 Driving and parking

R STEER CONTROL (/ page 168) R HOLD function (/ page 168) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 169) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 169) R Cruise control (/ page 171) R Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 189) R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 197) R AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 197)

Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 173) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent)

(/ page 177) R Route-based speed adaptation (country-

dependent) (/ page 178) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 184)

R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 180) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-

dependent) (/ page 182) R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend-

ent) (/ page 183) R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend-

ent) (/ page 179) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

with exit warning (/ page 193) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 195)

Parking Package R Rear view camera (/ page 200) R Surround view camera (/ page 202) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 205) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 210)

Functions of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, for instance, at maximum full-

stop braking or if there is insu cient tire trac- tion, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road con- ditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph

(5 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a

malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster a er the vehicle is star- ted.

Driving and parking 165

Function of BAS

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in

emergency braking situations. ABS pre- vents the wheels from locking.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP should only be deactivated in the

following situations.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) can moni- tor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery road. R When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the

situation.

When ESP is deactivated, the warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis- ted by ESP when braking.

When the warning lamp ashes, one or sev- eral wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current

road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is

necessary when pulling away.

166 Driving and parking

Deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu- ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 399) R Display messages (/ page 346)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they

spin.

R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

In uence of drive programs on ESP

The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif- ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP

mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 149).

Function of ESP Crosswind Assist

ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane: R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle

speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individual

brake application on one side.

Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP can only be activated/deactivated using

quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP can other- wise be found in the Assistance menu.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

# Select ESP. # Select On or Off.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Driving and parking 167

Function of EBD

Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char- acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure

on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, espe-

cially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol- lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both le wheels are on a

wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid

System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP is deactivated.

R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted fur- ther by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand- still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil- ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a su cient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in

the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on

the driver's side is fastened. R The vehicle has been started or has been

automatically switched o by the ECO start/ stop function.

168 Driving and parking

R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-

ted. R The transmission is in position h, k or i.

Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short

time quickly depress further until the display appears in the Instrument Display.

# Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the display

disappears from the Instrument Display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

ted. R The transmission is shi ed to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-

ing brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's

door is opened. R The vehicle is switched o . R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insu cient.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swi ly move your foot from the brake

pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto- nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-res- ted and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for ade- quate recuperation.

Driving and parking 169

You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver

is warned earlier and the attention level detec- ted by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accord- ingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra- tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis- play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes.

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST: - The fuller the circle, the higher the atten-

tion level determined - As your attention wanes, the circle in the

center of the display becomes smaller

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system o ers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga- tion to this rest area. This function can be activa- ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display. A er the vehicle is started, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx-

imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road sur-

face or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high corner-

ing speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If Active Steering Assist is activated and active

(/ page 180). R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre-

quently in active driving situations.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continu- ing the journey in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle.

170 Driving and parking

R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist

Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function.

If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.

# Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.

Speed control cruise control

Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163). MercedesAMG vehicles: Cruise control is availa- ble up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).

Displays in the Instrument Display Rh (gray): cruise control is selected but not

yet activated. Rh (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears along with theh dis- play. % The segments between the stored speed and

the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer.

System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking e ect. This relieves the load on the brake system and pre- vents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa- tions: R In tra c situations which require frequent

changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on winding roads

Driving and parking 171

R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R When visibility is poor

Operating cruise control

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the tra c situation

before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements: R Cruise control is selected. R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph

(20 km/h). R The transmission is in position h.

Steering wheel control panel for cruise control J Adopts the stored/detected speed Deactivates cruise control M Activates cruise control N Deactivates cruise control 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed

Activating cruise control # PressM.

Activating cruise control # PressM orN on control panel1.

The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

or # PressJ.

The last stored speed is called up and main- tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

% When you switch o the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards

from the bottom of control panel1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-

wards from the top of control panel1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). or

172 Driving and parking

# Brie y pressM orN on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the following values depending on the unit: R mph: the next value ending in 5 R km/h: the next value ending in 0

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # PressM on control panel1. Adopting a detected speed If cruise control is activated and Tra c Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster: # PressJ.

The maximum permissible speed shown by the tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed.

Deactivating cruise control # Press.

Deactivating cruise control

# PressN. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP inter-

venes, cruise control is deactivated.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:

15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h)

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the

selected drive program (fuel-saving, comforta- ble or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the

turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

- Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)

- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country- dependent)

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can auto- matically follow the vehicle in front when driving o again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving o , a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must

Driving and parking 173

now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163).

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the Instrument Display

Assistance graphic 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route

event (/ page 178) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator

4 Set speci ed distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis-

play

Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Rk (white): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC selected, speci ed distance set Rk (white vehicle, green speedometer):

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected Rk (green): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected Rr: Route-based speed adaptation active

(/ page 178).

The stored speed is shown along with the perma- nent status display and highlighted on the speed- ometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the

green vehicle symbol is displayed cycli- cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The Suspended message appears in the Instrument Display.

Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedome- ter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The Instrument Display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maxi- mum permissible speed.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,

in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is

dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.

174 Driving and parking

R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep

uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as

bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or acceler- ating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from accelera- tion or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is con-

siderably faster or slower than the cur- rently driven speed.

R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the tra c con- ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - cient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler- ation. If this deceleration is not su cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-

ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take

evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a di erent lane or when

changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-

tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex tra c conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the tra c conditions

carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening.

Driving and parking 175

R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been

successfully completed.

J Adopts the stored/detected speed Deactivates Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC 1 Increases/decreases the speed

K Increases/decreases the speci ed distance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC # To operate Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one nger or swipe on the control panel.

Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # PressH.

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: on control

panel1 pressM on the upper section or N on the lower section orJ. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

or # To activate with a stored speed: pressJ.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

Increasing or reducing the speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards

from the bottom of control panel1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-

wards from the top of control panel1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). or # Brie y pressM on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h).

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # PressM on the upper section of control

panel1.

Adopting the limit speed shown in the instrument cluster # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

176 Driving and parking

# PressJ. The limit speed displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # PressJ. or # Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and

rmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Reducing or increasing the speci ed distance from the vehicle in front # PressK.

Theh display appears. The speci ed dis- tance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

# Press. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP inter-

venes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 190).

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permit- ted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom- mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommen- ded speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163).

Driving and parking 177

System limits The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to the detection of tra c signs (/ page 189). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maxi- mum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer

# Ensure that the driven speed complies with tra c regulations.

# Adjust the driving speed to suit current tra c and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- ted, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restric- tions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 179). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll plazas R Turns and exits

R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c Infor- mation )

% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi- cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning o at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down

lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, roundabouts and tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. When route guidance is active, the rst speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con rmed and further speed adjustment is acti- vated.

178 Driving and parking

Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched o

before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or

brake pedal during the process.

System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road tra c regula- tions and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations: R The road's course not clearly visible R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi-

vidual lanes, for example at toll plazas R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc- tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol- lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calculated

route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed

speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the tra c situation.

Setting route-based speed adaptation

Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

ted. R ECO Assist is active.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function.

When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 178).

Function of Active Tra c Jam Assist Active Tra c Jam Assist helps you when in tra c jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneuvers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Tra c Jam Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehi- cles cutting in. Active Tra c Jam Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving sys-

Driving and parking 179

tems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163). Active Tra c Jam Assist activates automatically as soon as all of the requirements are met: The status display appears in the instrument cluster when the function is active. Requirements: R You are in a tra c jam on a freeway or high-

speed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated

and active (/ page 175). R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 184). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active

(/ page 182). R Active Tra c Jam Assist is activated

(/ page 180). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph

(60 km/h).

System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Tra c Jam Assist.

Activating/deactivating Active Tra c Jam Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select.

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed

range Active Steering Assist can use the sur- rounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches

to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Status display of Active Steering Assist in the Instrument Display R (gray): activated and passive R (green): activated and active R (red): system limits detected R (white, red hands): "hands on the steer-

ing wheel" prompt

% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and ashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as gray in the Instru- ment Display.

% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.

Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter- vene at any time to correct the course of the vehi- cle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a

180 Driving and parking

change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 182). If the driver steers, no warning is issued, or the warning is ended.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163).

System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor- que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steer- ing intervention is not su cient to keep the vehi- cle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,

fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,

direct sunlight or re ections. R Insu cient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.

R No, or several, unclear lane markings are pres- ent for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-

ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting

out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the fol- lowing conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When the tire pressure is too low.

Driving and parking 181

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer- ing Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehi- cle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel and observe the tra c carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention

to tra c conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer- ing Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steer- ing interventions. # Steer according to tra c conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements: R ESP is activated, but is not intervening.

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- ted.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select a Steering Assist.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display1 appears in the Instrument Dis- play. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con rmation to the system, a warning

tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes- sage. If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-

ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering

182 Driving and parking

R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

Active Lane Change Assist

Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver activates a turn signal indicator. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with mul-

tiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighboring lane is separated by a broken

lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The vehicle speed is between 50 mph

(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).

R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active.

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins a er the driver has activated the turn signal indi- cator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. The Lane Change to the Left message, for exam- ple, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When lane change assistance starts, the turn sig- nal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the Instrument Display. If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out a er a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the

Lane Change Canceled message appears in the Instrument Display. In addition, a warning tone may sound, depending on the situation.

& WARNING Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that

the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guaran- tee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque.

Driving and parking 183

# Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the tra c conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 180). The system may also be impaired or may not func- tion in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty, dam-

aged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a malfunction.

% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated.

Selecting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Select the function.

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following func- tions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Eva-

sive Steering Assist and cornering function

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedes- trians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis-

tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak- ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi- mum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163).

184 Driving and parking

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display1 appears in the Instrument Display and then auto- matically goes out a er a short time.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and complex tra c situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake

Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces- sary.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in vari- ous speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn- ing in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your

vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warn- ing tone and theL distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi- ded it is safe to do so and the tra c situation allows this.

Distance warning function (vehicles without Driv- ing Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi- cles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching crossing pedes- trians

Driving and parking 185

Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching moving pedes- trians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Autonomous braking function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approx- imately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph

(200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi- cles or moving pedestrians

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driv- ing Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approx- imately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles

R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and sta- tionary and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi- cles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes- trians

186 Driving and parking

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or

with kickdown R releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica- tion when one of the following conditions is ful l- led: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle R There is no longer a risk of collision R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of

your vehicle

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac- teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving

pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if

it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement

during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening

of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately

12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx- imately 43 mph (70 km/h).

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncom- ing lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have le the lane in which you are driving.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva- sive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog- nize objects or complex tra c situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces- sary.

Driving and parking 187

# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

System limits Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds a er switching on the vehicle or a er driving o . If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the warning lamp appears in the Instrument Display. The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,

in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interference

from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar re ections in a parking garage.

R If a loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning tire has been detected and displayed. R In complex tra c situations where objects

cannot always be clearly identi ed. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into

the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be

distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.

due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On curves with a tight radius.

% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto- matically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only par- tially available during the teach-in process.

Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting.

The setting is retained when the drive system is next started.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave

Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off.

The distance warning function, the autono- mous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the Instru- ment Display.

188 Driving and parking

Tra c Sign Assist

Function of Tra c Sign Assist Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 163). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and over- taking restrictions in the Instrument Display. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163). Since Tra c Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting tra c signs. The camera also detects tra c signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric- tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter- mine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can

be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a

restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction

% Vehicles with a standard Instrument Display: A + symbol next to a tra c sign in the Instru- ment Display indicates that additional tra c signs have been detected. These can also be

displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display.

If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the maxi- mum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instru- ment Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Tra c Sign Assist is not supported. Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes-

sages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 346).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient

illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,

direct sunlight or re ections.

Driving and parking 189

R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc- tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due

to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are covered. R If the information in the navigation system's

digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-

works or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs

outside the camera's eld of vision.

Setting Tra c Sign Assist

Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Switch the function on or o .

The speed limits detected by Tra c Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

% If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter

Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 175).

Displaying detected tra c signs in the media dis- play # Select Display in Central Display. # Switch the function on or o .

Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off.

Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warn- ing is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed.

Tra c Light Information service

& WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data

The tra c light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation.

190 Driving and parking

# Keep the actual tra c situation con- stantly in view when approaching a traf- fic light and when changing lanes.

# Avoid looking at the Instrument Display and Head-up Display for a long time.

The Instrument Display and Head-up Display (if available) show the tra c light icon and remaining time 1 until the next green phase as a countdown.

Example representation in the Instrument Display

The display is hidden about ve seconds before the tra c lights change to green.

% The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning o before the intersection

into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection

% The direction arrows are displayed depending on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active

route guidance

If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed.

% Use of the tra c light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to Mercedes- Benz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwarded to the provider of the tra c light information service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted a er a very short time (a few sec- onds) and are not permanently saved.

If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the

Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R You deactivate the service in the Assis-

tance menu in the multimedia system (/ page 192).

% This tra c light information service is only available in certain cities and regions.

The function is supported under the following con- ditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia sys-

tem featuring navigation and a communication module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me

Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user

account.

Driving and parking 191

R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The tra c light data service belongs to the

scope of the navigation services.

The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the tra c light data service provider. The provider gathers data from tra c lights which transmit their chang- ing phases. When the vehicle approaches an inter- section with networked tra c lights, data is trans- mitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal le or right and lane recommen- dations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, systems or components. Please note that the displayed data is not available in all tra c areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current tra c situa-

tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The information in the Instrument Display is shown a er selecting the display contents in the Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, the tra c light countdown is not displayed. Also observe the following information: R select a speed adapted to the tra c, sur-

roundings and weather conditions R observe actual tra c signs R observe applicable tra c rules and regula-

tions

Please observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility. You could otherwise fail to rec- ognize dangers.

System limits The display does not appear in the following situa- tions, for example: R There is no tra c light data available. R The time remaining until the next green phase

is less than ten seconds.

R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has

been interrupted. R The tra c light systems are located in a con-

struction site area or are undergoing mainte- nance. R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired.

Switching the tra c light information display on or o

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Switch Traffic Light Information onD or

o E.

192 Driving and parking

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 (40 m) behind and 10 (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx- imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse- quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Permanent status display in the instrument clus- ter: R (gray): system is activated but inopera-

tive R (green): system is activated and opera-

tional

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor- responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside

mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indi- cated only by the ashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly di erent speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 163).

Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about

approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly di ering speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the

tra c situation when opening the doors and make sure there is su cient clear- ance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occu- pant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to ash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes a er switching the vehicle o .

Driving and parking 193

The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi- tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi- cle occupants.

System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or

motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their

lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane

borders. Always make sure that there is su cient distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along- side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro- longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent

vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving

objects

Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correct- ing brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa- ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your-

self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display

194 Driving and parking

1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the Instrument Display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro- priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dan- gers (/ page 193). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are

located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate signi cantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated.

R A loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning tire is detected.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 163). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).

Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or tra c condi- tions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe dis- tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis- played in the on-board computer: R (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is

active and operating. R (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is

active but not operating. R: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva-

ted or there is a malfunction.

Driving and parking 195

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis- play1 appears in the Instrument Display. The system does not apply the brake if you acti- vate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehi- cle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane

marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake applica- tion (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at any

time if you steer slightly in the opposite direc- tion.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake applica- tion (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and

driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an

overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direc- tion.

System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-

erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of acceler- ation. R When ESP is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is

detected and displayed.

If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application takes place (/ page 197).

196 Driving and parking

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient

illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the

sun or re ections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc-

tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several

unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov-

ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes

branch o , cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if

the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty

or covered in snow and an obstacle is detec- ted in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Switch the function on or o .

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning.

Activate or deactivate the function.

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions.

The damping is tuned individually for each wheel and is a ected by the following factors: R The road surface conditions R Vehicle load R The drive program selected R The driving style

The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

AIR BODY CONTROL

AIR BODY CONTROL function

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com- fort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving

Driving and parking 197

at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con- sumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following com- ponents and functions: R Air suspension with variable spring rate R Automatic level control system R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel con-

sumption R Manually selectable high-level setting for

greater ground clearance R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with

constant damping force adjustment) R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button

Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive pro- gram Drive programA: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level.

R When driving at speeds of approximately 78 mph (125 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately

50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.

Drive program;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

Drive programC: R The suspension setting is rmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

Drive programB: R The suspension setting is even rmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program= (/ page 149).

Setting the vehicle level

& WARNING Risk of accident because vehi- cle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can dri outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to

the driving style and the road surface conditions.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi- cle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the

vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the

198 Driving and parking

wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle rst rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly a er- wards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered a er being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that

nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

# Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than

37 mph (60 km/h).

Raising the vehicle

# Press button1. Indicator lamp2 lights up. The vehicle is set to the high level. Your selection is saved.

The vehicle is automatically lowered again in the following situations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

Driving and parking 199

R When driving between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately three minutes. R A er changing a drive program using the

DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program.

Lowering the vehicle # Press button1.

Indicator lamp2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive pro- gram.

Rear view camera

Function of the rear view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown on the media dis- play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehi- cle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up.

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and park- ing remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuver- ing area while maneuvering and parking. The guide lines on the media display show the dis- tances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mir- ror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view 1 Driven surface depending on the current

steering angle (dynamic) 2 Guide lines at a distance of approximately

1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area

3 Lane marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

4 Bumper 5 Guide line at a distance of approximately

1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area

200 Driving and parking

Wide-angle view

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view 1 Yellow warning display: obstacles at a dis-

tance between approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) and 3.3 (1.0 m)

2 Orange warning display: obstacles at a dis- tance between approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) and 2.3 (0.7 m)

3 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area

4 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

5 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

6 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area

The color of warning display1/2 changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less

than 3.3 (1.0 m) R Yellow: obstacles at a distance between

approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) and 3.3 (1.0 m) R Orange: obstacles at a distance between

approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) and 2.3 (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of

approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) or less

% Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 4 are displayed in green.

Driving and parking 201

Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

System malfunction If the rear view camera is not operational, the System Inoperative message appears on the media display.

System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy

rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.

R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the

cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 163).

% Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360 camera

Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con- sists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system assists

you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a sub- stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuver- ing area while maneuvering and parking. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

202 Driving and parking

Views of the surround view camera

1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras

in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam-

era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a

trailer hitch)

Function of the guide lines Guide lines are also displayed in the camera images of the top views. These are based on the

current steering angle and show the distance to objects and other vehicles.

1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area

2 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area

% When Active Parking Assist is active, paths 2 are displayed in green.

The guide lines show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level.

In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warn- ing display is also shown (/ page 205). The color of warning display changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less

than 3.3 (1.0 m) R Yellow: obstacles at a distance between

approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) and 3.3 (1.0 m) R Orange: obstacles at a distance between

approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) and 2.3 (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of

approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) or less

% When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- tional and no object is detected, the warning display is shown here in blue.

Driving and parking 203

Wide-angle view, front

1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Top view with image from the front camera

1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 205)

2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take

at the current steering angle

Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors The front and rear sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys- tem Inoperative message appears in the media display. The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater

than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy

rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.

204 Driving and parking

R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged

up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which the

cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

% Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The eld of vision and other functions of the cam- era system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired

by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light

sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the surround view cam- era (/ page 278).

Calling up the view of the surround view camera using reverse gear # Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-

tem (/ page 202). # If, a er shi ing to reverse gear, the image of

the rear view camera is not shown: switch o the vehicle, press and hold thec button, switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear again.

Opening the camera cover of the rear view cam- era Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically a er

some time or a er an ignition cycle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park- ing assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the dis- tance between the vehicle and a detected obsta- cle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround- ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu- vering area while maneuvering and parking in/ exiting parking spaces.

Driving and parking 205

The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. During the parking proce- dure or maneuvering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must rst detect the object while you are driving past it. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a dis- tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown.

Displays on the media display

Vehicles with surround view camera

Vehicles without surround view camera

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- tional, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Obstacles detected at the front le and on

the right-hand side

The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approximately 3.3 (1 m) - 2.3

(0.7 m) R Orange: approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) - 1.2

(0.4 m) R Red: < 1.2 (0.4 m)

Vehicles with surround view camera: the boun- dary line shi s dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detec- ted, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multime- dia system (/ page 209).

206 Driving and parking

Standard setting: R Front and sides: < 1.2 (0.4 m) R Rear: < 3.3 (1 m)

Warn Early All Around: R Front: < 3.3 (1 m) R Sides: < 2.3 (0.7 m) R Rear: < 3.3 (1 m)

A continuous warning tone sounds from a dis- tance of approximately 0.7 (0.2 m), regardless of the selected setting.

Vehicles with surround view camera

Vehicles without surround view camera

If an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected and the Camera & Parking menu is not open on the media display, pop-up window1 appears: R vehicles without Active Parking Assist: at

speeds below 8 mph (12 km/h) R vehicles with Active Parking Assist: at speeds

below 11 mph (18 km/h)

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 (1.0 m) in front2 and 2.3 (0.7 m) on the side3 can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis- play.

System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. per-

sons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.

Driving and parking 207

R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi- cle from the side. R Objects placed next to the vehicle.

Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol- lowing situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it o . R You open the doors.

A er an engine start, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a warning can be issued. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 163).

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

1 Vehicles with surround view camera 2 Vehicles without surround view camera

If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the symbol appears in the instru- ment cluster, the system may have been deactiva- ted due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a di erent location.

If the symbol appears in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and

observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 278). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deacti-

vated due to a malfunction: restart the vehi- cle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi-

cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. ower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could other- wise be damaged.

208 Driving and parking

# Vehicles without AIR BODY CONTROL: press the button in the center console.

% Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (/ page 209).

If the indicator lamp in the button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indi- cator lamp is lit or the symbol appears in the Instrument Display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi-

cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the

sensors, e.g. ower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could other- wise be damaged.

Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Tap= on the media display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value.

Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Switch the function on or o .

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced

Driving and parking 209

when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warn- ing tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Switch the function on or o .

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur- round view camera. When you are driving for- wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist o ers the following func- tions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road

Vehicles with surround view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the

road (optionally either forwards or reverse)

R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (for exam- ple at the roadside) R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked

using Active Parking Assist

As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the display appears in the Instrument Display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the display appears in the Instru- ment Display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown on the media display. Vehicles with rear view camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked in reverse. Vehicles with surround view camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired.

When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calcu- lated path of your vehicle. The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- mals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol- lowing situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP intervenes. R You open the driver's door. R A er activating Active Parking Assist, you

press thec button again (/ page 211).

210 Driving and parking

System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks, or the bor- ders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detec- tion range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these

objects.

There is a danger of collision!

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identi ed as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,

packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes

beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more

than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly a er a tire change or when spare tires

are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high.

R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er bottoming out on a curb.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Parking with Active Parking Assist

Driving and parking 211

# Press button1.

Parking spaces detected by the system are shown in the media display. When the vehicle is station- ary, indicated vehicle path2 into currently selec- ted parking space3 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-

cle. # If necessary, select another parking space. # Vehicles with surround view camera: if neces-

sary, change the parking direction. # To start the parking procedure: con rm selec-

ted parking space3.

The turn signal indicator is switched on automati- cally when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If neces- sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display:

select the corresponding transmission posi- tion. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis- played in green in the camera image.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When

required by legal requirements or local condi- tions: turn the wheels towards the curb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro- cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa- ble, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be canceled.

212 Driving and parking

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view

camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active Park-

ing Assist.

Please note that you are responsible for the vehi- cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle. # Press button1.

The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.

# Select Exit Space2. or # If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular

to the direction of travel: select direction of travel3.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears on the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi- tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space and is brought to a standstill by Active Parking Assist (at an angle to the direction of travel). The Parking Assist Finished, Take Con- trol of Vehicle message appears.

# Take control of the vehicle and complete the parking process.

% The vehicle path shown on the media display may di er from the actual vehicle path. The turn signal indicator is switched on automati- cally when the exiting procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c condi- tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

Pausing Active Parking Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, for example: # Depressing the brake pedal # Opening the front passenger door, a rear door,

the trunk or the hood # Applying the electric parking brake or activat-

ing the HOLD function # To resume the parking or exiting procedure:

gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Driving and parking 213

% If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist Persons or objects detected in the maneuvering range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exit- ing procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon- ger in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Maneuvering assistance

Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detec- ted in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is brie y reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in the media display. Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 216). % You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away

Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 208).

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- ted detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and tra c situations. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- essary, provided the tra c situation per- mits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi- tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- mals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of collision may occur in the following situa- tions, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are inter-

changed. R If an incorrect transmission position is

engaged.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R If you shi the transmission position to k or

h when the vehicle is stationary.

214 Driving and parking

R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 (1.0 m) away. R If the maneuvering assistance function is acti-

vated in the multimedia system.

System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 205).

Function of Cross Tra c Alert % Cross Tra c Alert is only available for vehicles

with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Tra c Alert can warn drivers of any cross- ing tra c when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, theL symbol appears in the media display and the vehi- cle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

% Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 193).

System limits Cross Tra c Alert is not available on inclines.

Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent colli- sions with pedestrians when the vehicle is back- ing up at slow speeds. If the rear view camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower

than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the media dis-

play .

You can activate and deactivate the maneuvering brake function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 216). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu:

% If the maneuvering brake function is not avail- able, the same symbol appears in gray.

The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneu- vering range.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- ted detection by the maneuvering brake function

The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnec- essarily or not brake at all.

Driving and parking 215

# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on the maneuvering brake function alone.

# Be ready to brake.

System limits Observe the system limits of the following func- tions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 210) R Surround view camera (/ page 202) R Rear view camera (/ page 200)

The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines

Activating/deactivating maneuvering assistance Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or o .

Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for at towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys- tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar- anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Observe the following information: R Permitted towing methods (/ page 294) R The notes on towing the vehicle with both

axles on the ground (/ page 295)

216 Driving and parking

Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer

& WARNING Risk of accident if the instru- ment display fails

If the instrument display has failed or is mal- functioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at

a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and com- munications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes- sages and warnings from speci c systems on the instrument display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and in accordance with the tra c conditions. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

Instrument display and on-board computer 217

Overview of instrument display

1 Speedometer The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

2 Index points 3 Outside temperature

4 Time 5 Area for additional values (example: tachome-

ter): tachometer/navigation/ECO display/ consumption/G-meter/date The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tachom- eter (overrevving range) is reached.

6 Coolant temperature display

During normal operation, coolant temperature display6 is permitted to rise to the red mark. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and CHARGE displays (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the elec- tric motor)

7 Selected drive program

218 Instrument display and on-board computer

8 Selected transmission position 9 Center display area of the instrument display

(example: standard display for a trip): assis- tance/telephone/navigation/trip/media/ radio/styles and displays/service/possible settings for Head-up Display

A Fuel level and fuel ller ap location indicator

Overview of buttons on the steering wheel Depending on the equipment, the layout and the design of the control elements on the steering wheel may di er.

1 Control panel for cruise control or Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 172)

2G Back button, on-board computer 3 Touch Control, on-board computer

To navigate: swipe To con rm: press a

4 Main menu, on-board computer 5 Main menu, MBUX multimedia system

6 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system To navigate: swipe To con rm: press a

7G Back button, MBUX multimedia system 8 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-

tem Voice Control System

9 Adjusts the brightness of the instrument light- ing

Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

Instrument display and on-board computer 219

The on-board computer is operated using the le - hand Touch Control and the le -hand back/home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, di erent acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. % To operate the Touch Control in the most

e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos- sible.

The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone

R Navigation R Trip R Radio R Media R Service R Vehicles with an instrument display in the

widescreen cockpit: Designs

% You can nd information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.

The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the instrument display. # To call up the menu bar: press the le -hand

back button until the menu bar is displayed.

% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.

# To scroll on the menu bar: swipe le or right on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To call up a menu, submenu or possible set- tings on the menu, or con rm a selection or setting: press the le -hand Touch Control.

# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a function, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or down- wards on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To exit a submenu: press the le -hand back button.

Selecting the Head-up Display # To switch on the Head-up Display: switch on

the Head-up Display via the multimedia sys- tem or activate it on the menu bar by swiping upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display menu will be selected on the Head-up Display.

# To switch to the Head-up Display: press the le -hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To set the three display ranges of the Head- up Display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

220 Instrument display and on-board computer

Full-screen menus You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display: R Assistance R Trip R Navigation # On the corresponding menu, use the le -hand

Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list. # Press the le -hand Touch Control.

The selected menu will be displayed full- screen.

Overview of displays on the instrument display Displays on the instrument display: u Active Parking Assist activated

(/ page 211) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated

(/ page 209, 208) h Cruise control (/ page 171) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 173)

Active Brake Assist (/ page 188) Active Steering Assist (/ page 180) Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 179) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 195) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 183) ECO start/stop function (/ page 144) HOLD function (/ page 168) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 117)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 118)

Vehicles with Tra c Sign Assist: Detected instruc- tions and tra c signs (/ page 189). For an overview of the indicator and warning lamps, see (/ page 399).

Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The Head-up Display projects the following infor- mation into the driver's eld of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and driv-

ing safety systems R Some warning messages

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, di erent content can be shown in the three areas of the Head-up Display (/ page 222).

Instrument display and on-board computer 221

Display content

1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and tra c signs 4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise

control)

System limits The visibility of the displays will be a ected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light

R Wet road surface R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses

% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the Head-up Display o and on again.

Setting the Head-up Display using the on-board computer

On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following Head-up Display settings or displays can be selected or shown: R Position R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R Voice Control System

# To select the Settings menu: swipe to the right on the le -hand Touch Control. The Settings menu5 will be selected.

# To call up the Settings menu: press the le - hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the le or right on the le -hand Touch Control.

Setting messages, assistance status, telephone, audio and the Voice Control System # Press the le -hand Touch Control.

The list of setting options will be displayed. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand

Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the le -hand Touch Control.

222 Instrument display and on-board computer

Selecting what the Head-up Display shows

(Example) 1 Switches the Head-up Display on/o 2 Le display area

Navigation system Average consumption G-meter

3 Central display area Speedometer Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning

4 Right display area Tra c Sign Assist Assistant display

5 To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area

6 Index points 7 Lower display area (example: le display area)

Display areas2 to4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will

be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the lat- est calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively oper- ated.

# Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Con- trol.

# Press the le -hand Touch Control.

Switching the Head-up Display on/o via the mul- timedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD.

The Head-up Display is activated.

Instrument display and on-board computer 223

Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and com- munications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of func- tion and product designation of your MBUX multi- media system may di er from the description and

images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not avail- able in all equipment variants.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system

2 Media display with touch functionality

3 Control panel for telephone, navigation, radio/media, vehicle functions/system set- tings and favorites/themes

4 Touchpad with controller 5 Controller

Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches sound on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per- formance exhaust system: Turn: adjusts the volume Press brie y: switches the mute function on/o Press and hold: switches the multimedia system on/o

6 button switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per- formance exhaust system: button Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG Performance exhaust system

As an alternative operating possibility, you can conduct a dialog with the Voice Control System.

224 MBUX multimedia system

% You can nd further information about opera- tion as well as about applications and serv- ices in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Anti-the protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against the . Further information on protection against the can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

MBUX multimedia system 225

Home screen overview

1 Depending on the display, calls up the rst three applications or the home screen

2 Calls up the pro le 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call system is not available) 5 Mercedes me connect active 6 Transmission of vehicle position active

7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time

8 Calls up the Noti cations Center 9 Calls up an application using the symbol A Application and current information B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address C Index points and selected display area

D Calls up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and

FAVORITES

226 MBUX multimedia system

% If Mercedes me connect5 is active , the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the back- end system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Fur- ther details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data pro- tection information. The function is country- dependent. If transmission of vehicle position6 is active , Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

Using Touch Control

1 Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control

=9: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (con rm)

3G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call

~ Rejects or ends a call 5 Increase volume: swipe upwards

Reduce volume: swipe down

8 Switch o the sound: press 6 Starts the Voice Control System Calls up favorites (press brie y) or adds favorites and themes (press and hold)

% To operate Touch Control2 in the most e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos- sible.

Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control2 with single- nger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direc-

tion.

Using the touchscreen # Select menu options, symbols or characters

by pressing brie y. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, le or

right. # To use handwriting to enter characters: write

the character with one nger on the touchscreen.

MBUX multimedia system 227

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two n- gers together or apart.

# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.

% For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

Using the touchpad and controller

1G Returns to the previous display 2 Controller 3 Shows the home screen 4 Touchpad 5 Shows the home screen

6~ Calls up the control menu of the last active audio source

7G Returns to the previous display # Carry out the operation. Operating the controller R Turn3 counter-clockwise or clockwise. R Slide1 le or right. R Slide4 up or down. R Slide2 diagonally. R Press7 brie y or press and hold.

Operating the touchpad (examples): R To select a menu option, swipe and press. R If handwriting recognition is active, write a

character on the touchpad. R Swipe down or up with two ngers.

The Noti cations Center is opened or closed. R Move two ngers apart or together on the

map. The map scale is increased or decreased.

228 MBUX multimedia system

Calling up applications using buttons

1 % button calls up the telephone 2z button calls up navigation 3| button calls up radio or media 4y button calls up vehicle functions 5 button

Press brie y: calls up favorites Press and hold: adds a favorite or creates a new theme

# Alternatively, tap on the touchscreen. # Call up the application (/ page 226).

Functions of the Voice Control System

& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and com- munications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control sys- tem: R Observe the legal requirements for the coun-

try in which you are driving.

R If you use the voice control system in an emer- gency your voice can change and your tele- phone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control sys-

tem functions before starting the journey. With the Voice Control System, various applica- tions in the MBUX multimedia system are opera- ble using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds a er the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Address book R Radio R Media R Vehicle functions

MBUX multimedia system 229

Starting the Voice Control System

# Press1. or # Say "Hello Mercedes".

Information on pro les, themes, suggestions and favorites

For electrically adjustable seats observe the fol- lowing notes.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le

Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust- ment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driv-

er's seat is being adjusted using the mul- timedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the

media display. or

# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre- venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le. Pro les store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own pro le without changing the stored pro le settings of other drivers. % Information on pro les from Mercedes me

connect can be found in the Digital Opera- tor's Manual.

Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multi- media system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favorites.

230 MBUX multimedia system

For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the highway, you can save your prefer- red settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive pro- gram, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then o ers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio sta- tions or contacts. The requirements for that are the selection of a pro le, your consent to the recording of data and su cient collected data. Favorites provide quick access to applications that are used o en. You can select favorites from categories or add them directly to an application.

Con guring pro les, themes and suggestions

Multimedia system: 4 5f Profiles

Creating a new pro le # Select W Create Profile . # Select an avatar.

# Enter the name and con rm with a. # Select Continuer . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth and select Connect

Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user pro le .

# Select Finish.

Selecting pro le options # Select for a pro le.

The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a pro le R Resetting themes or favorites R Con guring suggestions

Con guring suggestions # Select for a pro le. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow

Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Sug- gestions on or o .

# To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. Learning for 24 h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active pro le. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula- ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.

Creating new themes # Select. # Select THEMES. # Select W Create Theme.

The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.

# Select Continuer. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and

store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continuer. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continuer. # Select an image.

MBUX multimedia system 231

# Enter the names into the entry eld and con- rm with a.

# Select Save.

System settings Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make set- tings in the following menus and control ele- ments: R Display

- Styles - Instrument lighting - Display brightness - Edge lighting - Day/night design R Control elements

- Keyboard language and handwriting recog- nition

- Sensitivity of the touchpad - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls

R Voice Control System R Sound

- Entertainment - Navigation and tra c announcements - Telephone - Voice ampli cation to the rear R Connectivity

- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC R Time & date R Language R Units for distance R So ware updates R Data import/export R PIN protection R System Reset

Information on important system updates

Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data.

Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required

for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update

by restarting the system

% If automatic so ware updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto- matically.

The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install

The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information

Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later

232 MBUX multimedia system

The system update can be downloaded man- ually at a later time.

Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched o . If the download of a deep system update is com- pleted and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this a er the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location

before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched o . R Notes and warnings have been read and

accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied.

If all requirements have been ful lled, the down- loaded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle func- tions are restricted.

If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali ed special- ist workshop to resolve the problem.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multime-

dia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least

one of the types of connection described.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi.

Connecting the multimedia system with an exter- nal hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selec- ted on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may di er depend-

ing on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.

# Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot.

Connecting using a QR code # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect using a QR code. # Scan the displayed QR code with the device to

be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

MBUX multimedia system 233

Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device

to be connected (see the manufacturer's oper- ating instructions).

# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys- tem.

# Con rm the entry with.

Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.

The multimedia system generates an eight- digit PIN.

# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Con rm the entry.

Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi

network.

# Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options

on the device to be connected (see the manu- facturer's operating instructions).

# Press the WPS button on the device to be con- nected.

# Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection.

Connecting with a known Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network.

The connection is established again.

Con guring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot- spot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the

device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on

the device to be connected and con rm.

Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external

device's display on the multimedia system.

Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be

connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Select Continue.

234 MBUX multimedia system

Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con-

nected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.

# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.

# Con rm the entry.

Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehi-

cle's NFC interface. # Select Finished.

The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot.

# Select Generate Security Key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab- lished, the new security key must be entered.

System language

Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language a ects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.

Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Language # Set the language.

% If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Naviga- tion announcements are then also made in Arabic.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)

& WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions

While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when

the vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones

MBUX multimedia system 235

R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connec- tion R Individual user pro les

% The guest pro le is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings.

% Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.

A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes.

The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your system, this will also be reset.

Navigation Notes on navigation

Route guidance with augmented reality

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c

situation. # Avoid extended observation of the cam-

era image.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information

The additional information from the augmen- ted reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation.

# Always keep an eye on the actual tra c situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press thez button.

The map shows the vehicle's current position. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guid- ance is active.

# To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.

236 MBUX multimedia system

Navigation overview

Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti-

nation entry options 2 Cancels active route guidance 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and

switch navigation announcements on or o

4 ON THE WAY menu with Route Overview, Alternative Routes and Report Traffic Inci- dent (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic Announcements, Area Alerts and Live Traffic Subscription Info Displays Route List

POSITION menu with Save Position and Com- pass

5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and High- way Information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced

MBUX multimedia system 237

Entering a destination

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

1 Federal state or province in which the vehicle is located

2 Enters a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry

5 a Con rms an entry 6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language

A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols

B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in2. The entries can

be made in any order.

238 MBUX multimedia system

The following entries can be made, for example: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name # Select a search result in list3. # Calculate the route (/ page 239). % You can nd further information about desti-

nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or prov-

ince1. # Select the federal state or the province in1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list3. # Select the federal state or the province from

list3.

Using online search % Requirements: the media display shows an

Internet connection with a double-arrow sym- bol in the status line.

Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search nds no suitable destinations or if you change countries, the online search is avail- able. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address. # Enter the destination in input line2.

The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list.

The detailed view for the route is displayed. or # Select country indicator1. # Select the provider for the online service from

the countries list. # Enter the destination in input line2. # Select the destination in the list.

Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance

Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

1 No route yet. A route has been mapped.

MBUX multimedia system 239

# Select. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.

or # Select. # Select Set as Waypoint.

The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.

or # Select Start New Route Guidance.

The destination address is set as the new des- tination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.

Selecting route settings # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take tra c information into consideration with

Dynamic Route Guidancer.

# Select route options with Avoid Options. # Activate Suggest Alternative Route.

Alternative routes are calculated for every route.

# Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.

Activating route guidance with augmented reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera

symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning maneuver and will show additional information.

# To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.

Displaying additional information in the camera image # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality.

# Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.

Using map functions

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one nger

on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two ngers on the

media display.

Moving the map # Move one nger in any direction on the

touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle posi-

tion: press\ brie y.

240 MBUX multimedia system

Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol

on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up.

Switching highway information on/o # SelectZ. # Switch Highway Information on or o .

Using services

Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the

Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account

and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available.

R The service has been activated at an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. R The following additional conditions apply to

the Parking service: - The navigation services option is available,

subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal.

- The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

Displaying the tra c situation with Live Tra c Information # SelectZ. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements.

# Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing Traffic and Delay: switch on. If tra c information has been received, then tra c incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn- ing messages are displayed. The tra c delay is displayed for the current route. Tra c delays lasting one minute or lon- ger are taken into consideration.

Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X-Commu- nication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traf- fic Incidents options. # Set the options.

If Traffic is switched o and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.

Displaying weather information and other map contents # SelectZ. # Select Advanced.

MBUX multimedia system 241

# Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-

TENT category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.

Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

Parking service

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head- room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged. # Observe the signposted headroom clear-

ance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the

permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

* NOTE Before selecting the parking option

The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the parking garage/parking lot. # Always observe the local Information and

conditions.

% This service is not available in all countries. # SelectZ and activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option.

The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if avail- able): R Destination address, distance from current

vehicle position and arrival time

R Information on the parking garage/parking lot, for example: - Opening times - Parking charges - Current occupancy - Maximum parking time - Maximum access height

The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances.

R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tari s R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking

meter) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number

# Calculate the route (/ page 239).

242 MBUX multimedia system

Notes on the dashcam

* NOTE Before using the dashcam

You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the coun- try in which the dashcam is operated. There- fore, observe the legal requirements, in partic- ular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-speci c regula-

tions.

Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam

Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the

multimedia system .

Multimedia system: 4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple partitions,

recorded video les are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.

Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam

Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multime-

dia system . R The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the

multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 243).

# Select the Individual Recording or Loop Recording recording mode. If Individual Recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops. If Loop Recording has been selected, several short video les are recorded. When the mem- ory limit is reached, the oldest video le is deleted and recording is continued automati- cally.

# To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video le is stored on the USB device.

# To end: select End Recording.

MBUX multimedia system 243

A report may appear in the following cases: R For the Individual Recording recording mode:

the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video le. R If a video recording has started and a national

border is detected, the National Border Crossed. Please observe the country-spe- cific regulations on video recording. message appears. This function is not available in all countries. R The camera is not functional, the Camera

Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Telephone Telephony

Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from operat- ing integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment inte- grated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from oper- ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the tra c situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com-

munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around

244 MBUX multimedia system

and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot

be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not

protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart- ment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 102) Bluetoothconnection:

The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth pro le of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Blue- tooth pro les: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le)

- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.

R MAP (Message Access Pro le) - The mobile phone message functions can

be used on the multimedia system.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manu- facturer's operating instructions. Network connection:

The following cases can lead to the call being dis- connected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception sta-

tion, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the

network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into

the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require- ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may uctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

MBUX multimedia system 245

Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone

2 Bluetooth device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)

3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone 4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 5 Options

6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search

Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel- ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime-

dia system via Bluetooth.

246 MBUX multimedia system

R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode). - You can use all the functions of the multi-

media system with the mobile phone in the foreground.

- You can receive incoming calls and mes- sages with the mobile phone in the back- ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia sys-

tem.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone

Searching for a mobile phone # Select. # Select Connect New Device.

Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pairing. # Select a mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If both codes match, con rm the code on the mobile phone.

Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:

- R Accept a call - k End Call - i Create Confer. Call - Accepting or rejecting a waiting call

R Managing contacts, e.g.: - Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Saving a contact as a favorite R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:

- Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message

MBUX multimedia system 247

Mercedes me app Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

# Press me button1.

Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button2 , press it

brie y. # Press and hold SOS button3 for at least one

second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz customer center has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 248). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz customer center for general

information about the vehicle

You can nd information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-

Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz customer center (/ page 250).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center using the multimedia system

Requirements: R Access to a mobile phone network is available. R The contract partner's mobile network cover-

age is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehi-

cle data can be transferred automatically.

248 MBUX multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5g

# Call Mercedes me connect. A er con rmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz customer center.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center a er automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or break-

down situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.

% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown sit- uations under certain circumstances.

In the event an accident or breakdown is detec- ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. A er quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. R The vehicle data is sent automatically

(/ page 251). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center

takes your call and organizes the break- down and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an

automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls.

% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear a er a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or

have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be con rmed or declined. A er being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage- ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz customer center. You will then receive individual recommen- dations regarding the maintenance of your vehi- cle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multime- dia system reminds you a er a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears ask- ing if you would like to make an appointment.

MBUX multimedia system 249

# To arrange a service appointment: select Call. A er your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to con rm the appoint- ment and if necessary consult about the details.

% If you select Later a er the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap- pears at a later time.

Transferred data during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be ful lled for the transfer of the data: R The vehicle is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup-

ported by the mobile phone network provider. R The quality of the mobile connection is su -

cient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following fac- tors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission tech-

nology. R The activated Mercedes me connect services. R The service selected in the voice control sys-

tem.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa- ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identi cation number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication plat-

form installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also trans- mitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made a er automatic accident or break- down detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz customer center: R Current vehicle location

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

250 MBUX multimedia system

Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system a er the call is nished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-speci c data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz customer center and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz customer center. Please take note of the data pro- tection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recor- ded message immediately a er calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center. % The recorded message is not available in

every country.

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv- ices.

You can use the following services via the multi- media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me

button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto-

matic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break- down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 248). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz customer center using the multimedia system (/ page 248). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call the national emergency services using the stand- ard national emergency service telephone num- bers. In emergencies, you can also use the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 255). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por- tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency

call system (/ page 255) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for- wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- dent and Breakdown Management. Forward- ing the call is however not possible in all coun- tries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on

location and/or the towing away of the vehicle

MBUX multimedia system 251

to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide a er auto-

matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 249) In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur- ther vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz customer cen- ter and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service

Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, speci c wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes- Benz customer center for further help. This

prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover- age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the trans- ferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the informa- tion to appear in the multimedia system.

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por- tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con- nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con-

trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can nd out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes

me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your Mercedes me user account.

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me

apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me

user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes

me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services

252 MBUX multimedia system

R Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the web browser depending on availability

Web browser overview

The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.

1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options

% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Overview of smartphone integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multime- dia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- ted via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia

MBUX multimedia system 253

system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth

with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte- gration is only possible with an Internet connec- tion. The appropriate application must be down- loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Apple CarPlay

R Android Auto

% For safety reasons, the rst activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied.

You can start Apple CarPlay or Android Auto from the device manager.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehi- cle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly acces- sible. The following system information is transmitted: R So ware release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to optimize com- munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly gen- erated. This has no connection to the vehicle identi ca- tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi- media system is reset (/ page 235).

The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling

and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type

The transfer of this data is used to alter how con- tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit- uation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continua- tion in a tunnel).

254 MBUX multimedia system

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dial- ing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insu cient net- work coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being trans- mitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the sys- tem relies on the transmission of data detailed in the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call system data transmission" section that follows (/ page 257). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deac- tivate the vehicle's communication module.

Deactivation of this module prevents the activa- tion of any and all Mercedes me connect serv- ices. A er the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The vehicle must be switched on before an auto- matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is transferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.

Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an acci- dent site in places that are di cult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such,

eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically or manually. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, appears in the display. You can nd more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes- benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-Benz

emergency call system (e.g. a malfunction with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears on the display in the instrument cluster.

MBUX multimedia system 255

Triggering an automatic MercedesBenz emer- gency call

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is su ciently charged.

The MercedesBenz emergency call system trig- gers an emergency call automatically in the fol- lowing cases: R A er activation of the restraint systems such

as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices a er an accident R A er an emergency stop automatically initi-

ated by Active Emergency Stop Assist

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel ashes until the emergency call is nished.

It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance

is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # To use the SOS button in the overhead con-

trol panel: press and hold the SOS button for at least one second (/ page 248).

# To use voice control: use the Voice Control System voice commands .

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

256 MBUX multimedia system

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone.

Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Using the multifunction steering wheel: select

~. Depress the button for several seconds.

Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred

meters before the incident) () R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the

vehicle

R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated

manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system

Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clari cation purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour a er the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter-

mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants

can be established.

MBUX multimedia system 257

Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated.

9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.

Options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

258 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings Select to make settings.

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with

the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth) R Playing back audio or video les

Authorizing a Bluetooth audio device for media playback

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia sys-

tem and audio equipment.

R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth

audio pro les A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devi-

ces.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5

With Bluetooth audio, you can play back music les from an external data storage medium, e.g.

your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio les using the multimedia

system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.

Authorizing a new Bluetooth audio device # Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device.

Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, con rm on the audio equipment.

# Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.

MBUX multimedia system 259

Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth

audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth audio device from the list.

The connection is being established.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

Z Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example: R Navigation and tra c announcements R Frequency x function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings

The setting options are country-dependent.

260 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

HD HD radio Select to switch the HD Radio function on or o . This function is not available in all countries.

8 Silent function Select to switch o the sound.

f Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets.

4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of TuneIn radio % A relatively large volume of data can be trans-

mitted when using TuneIn Radio.

MBUX multimedia system 261

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account

Favorites Select during playback to save the station cur- rently set as a favorite.

6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.

5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio sta- tion.

Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM satellite radio o ers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% com- mercial-free music, sports, news and entertain- ment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a eet of high-performance satellites to

broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is availa- ble for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

262 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels

with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport

alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam-

lessly

5 Playback control Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode.

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

Depending on the frequency band selected, di er- ent functions are available to you.

Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements:

MBUX multimedia system 263

R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The data volume is available.

Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis-

sion free of interference.

% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

% The functions and services are country- dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio.

The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Setting up satellite radio

Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has

been completed. R If registration is not included when purchasing

the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z Options # Select Service Information.

The service information screen appears show- ing the radio ID and the current subscription status.

# Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service sta 's instructions.

The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

% You can also have the satellite service activa- ted online. To do so, please visit https://

www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

Music and sport alerts

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z 5 Alerts

Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of

matches in the Live program.

Activating the music information function # Activate Music Alerts O.

Setting a music alert # Select Add Alert.

264 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.

Activating sports information # Activate Activate Sports Alerts O.

Setting a sport alert # Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog

window.

Deleting individual sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries.

All highlighted alerts are deleted.

Deleting all sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries.

All alerts are deleted.

Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can nd out which sound system is installed in your

vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Standard sound system and Advanced sound sys- tem The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

Burmester surround sound system and Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester high-end 3D surround

sound system only) R Sound pro les R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

MBUX multimedia system 265

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display informs you of the time or dis- tance remaining before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using theG back button on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is o en le idling for long

periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such oper- ating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the servic- ing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press theG back but-

ton on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer

(/ page 219).

Information on regular maintenance work

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service inter-

vals.

# Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on nor- mal operation of the vehicle. Have the mainte- nance work carried out more o en than prescri- bed if operating conditions are di cult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibil- ity as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more o en than speci ed based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate

stops R Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or

on poor road surfaces

266 Maintenance and care

R When the engine is o en le idling for long periods R Operation in particularly dusty conditions

and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter, for example, changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further informa- tion can be obtained at a quali ed specialist work- shop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can cal- culate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date

on the instrument display before disconnect- ing the battery (/ page 266).

Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is

locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood

The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there is

a person in the hood's range of move- ment.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood in the event of an over- heated engine or re in the engine compart- ment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other

escaping hot operating uids. # Before opening the hood, allow the

engine to cool down. # In the event of a re in the engine com-

partment, keep the hood closed and call the re service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched o . Observe the following if you must open the hood:

Maintenance and care 267

# Switch o the vehicle. # Never touch the danger zones surround-

ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching live components

The ignition system and the fuel injection sys- tem operate with a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition

system or fuel injection system when the vehicle is switched on.

The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Fuel injectors

R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open

If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windshield wipers

and the vehicle rst if you need to open the hood.

Opening the hood

# To release the hood, pull on handle1.

268 Maintenance and care

# Push handle1 of the hood catch upwards and li the hood until it opens automatically.

Closing the hood # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in

(20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a lit- tle force as you let it go.

# If the hood can still be li ed slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the on-board computer

Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed.

The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level One of the following messages will appear on the instrument display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement

of the oil level is not yet possible. # Repeat the request a er a maximum of

30 minutes' driving. R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for

indicating the oil level on the instrument dis- play is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct. R Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar dis-

play for indicating the oil level on the instru- ment display is orange and is below "min":

# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. R Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display

for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is above "max":

Maintenance and care 269

# Drain o any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. R For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On # Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil

level. R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil

level sensor is defective or not connected. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. R Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood.

Re lling engine oil

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled

next to the ller opening. # Allow the engine to cool o and thor-

oughly clean the engine oil from compo- nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor- rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives

# Do not use engine oils or oil lters which do not correspond to the speci cations explicitly prescribed for the service inter- vals.

# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.

# Do not use additives.

* NOTE Damage caused by re lling too much engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a

quali ed specialist workshop.

% Depending on driving style, the vehicle con- sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liter) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

270 Maintenance and care

# Turn cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # Add engine oil. # Replace cap1 and turn it clockwise until it

engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 269).

Checking the coolant level

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool- ant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening

the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective

gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Check the coolant temperature display in the

instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot- tom quarter of the temperature display.

# Slowly turn cap1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure.

Maintenance and care 271

# Continue turning cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to

marker bar2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to

0.6 in (1.5 cm) over the marker bar2. # If necessary, add coolant that has been

approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Further information on coolant (/ page 341)

Re lling the windshield washer system

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly am- mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the ller opening.

# Remove cap1 by the tab. # Add washer uid. % Further information about the windshield

washer uid (/ page 342)

272 Maintenance and care

Keeping the air-water duct free # Keep the area between the hood and the

windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.

Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking e ect a er washing the vehicle

The braking e ect is reduced a er washing the vehicle. # A er the vehicle has been washed, brake

carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until the braking e ect has been fully restored.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situa- tions: # During towing # In a car wash

* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure

that the car wash is suitable for the vehi- cle dimensions.

# Ensure there is su cient ground clear- ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is su cient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R To avoid possible water ingress in the vehicle,

it is preferable to use car washes which allow the high-pressure pre-cleaning to be deactiva- ted (speci cation for the convertible program). R Avoid any hot-wax treatment. R Make sure that the wind de ector on the wind-

shield has been retracted. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-

ted. R The HOLD function is switched o . R The surround view camera or the rear view

camera is switched o . R The side windows and so top are closed

completely.

Maintenance and care 273

R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched o . R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R For car washes with a conveyor system:

- Neutral i is engaged. - If you would like to leave the vehicle while

it is being washed, make sure the Smart- Key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged.

% If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Notes on using a power washer

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex- pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-

spray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts

replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm)

to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm)

between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140F (60C). R Observe the information on the correct dis-

tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper- ating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer

directly at sensitive parts, such as tires, so top, wind de ector net, gaps, electrical com- ponents, batteries, light sources and ventila- tion slits.

Washing the vehicle by hand

* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress # Take care not to point the water jet

directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.

Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays.

274 Maintenance and care

# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a

so car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and dry using a chamois.

% Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 278).

Notes on paintwork/matte nish paintwork care

To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o

a erwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by

rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro- leum ether or lighter uid.

R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-

als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matte nish R Only use care products approved for

Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-

als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the

latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash program with a nal hot

wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing

products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.

In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a

quali ed specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function

(/ page 163).

Notes on cleaning decorative foils

Observe the notes on matte nish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte nish paint- work care" (/ page 275). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.

Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild

cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is oth- erwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably.

Maintenance and care 275

R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recommen- ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o

a erwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped

vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils

are impaired by: - Sunlight - Temperature, e.g. hot air blower - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.

Polishing will have the e ect of shining the foil-wrapped surface.

R Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di er- ences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car-

ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Notes on cleaning and care of the so top

Observe the following notes in order to prevent damage to the so top.

Light dirt R Clean the so top when dry. R Rinse with clean water.

Normal to heavy dirt R Clean the so top with a brush and clean

water. R Clean stains and other heavy dirt with a brush

and so -top cleaning agents recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Brush from front to back in the direction of the

fabric.

Avoiding so -top damage R Never use gasoline, thinners, tar or stain

remover or other organic solvents. R Remove bird droppings immediately, as they

are corrosive and can therefore cause the so -top fabric to leak. R Never use a power washer. R Do not use sharp-edged equipment to remove

ice and snow.

Frequent cleaning reduces the so top's resist- ance to dirt. To restore the e ect, clean the so top with the so -top cleaning agents recommen- ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging, can cause the so -top seams to leak. If this happens,

276 Maintenance and care

have the so -top seams sealed at a quali ed spe- cialist workshop, e.g. at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % Place a suitable cover over the so top if you

plan to leave the vehicle outside for a long period of time.

Cleaning AIRCAP

Cleaning the wind de ector

* NOTE Damage to the net due to using a power washer

# Never use a power washer to clean the net of the wind de ector.

Requirements: R The so top is closed. R The electric parking brake has been applied. R The vehicle is switched on.

# Pull button1. The wind de ector between the windshield and the so top will extend.

# Light dirt: clean wind de ector net1 with a so brush or a damp cloth.

# Heavier dirt: clean net1 with care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

# Rinse or spray the net with clean water.

Cleaning the wind screen

Requirements: R The so top is open. R The electric parking brake has been applied. R The vehicle is switched on.

Maintenance and care 277

# Pull button1. The AIRCAP wind screen will move upwards.

# Clean wind screen net1 with a damp cloth in conjunction with the care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the folding wind screen

* NOTE Damage to the net due to using a power washer

# Never use a power washer to clean the net of the wind de ector.

Requirements: R Make sure that the notes on the correct instal-

lation and stowing location of the folding wind screen are observed (/ page 79).

# Clean folding wind screen net with a damp cloth in conjunction with the care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

Notes on care of vehicle parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind- shield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned

If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windshield wipers

and the vehicle before cleaning the wind- shield or wiper blades.

278 Maintenance and care

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the

tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super- vise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts:

Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to

remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and

brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes

a er cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.

Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a

damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom- mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-

based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.

% A er changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen- ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or blinding spots.

% Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind- shield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available (/ page 163).

Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement

position (/ page 122).

R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

% Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too o en.

Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild

cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bump-

ers with a so cloth and car shampoo (/ page 163). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini-

mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).

Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia

system (/ page 205). R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the

camera lens.

Maintenance and care 279

R Do not use a power washer.

Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for

Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and a er washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.

Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking o a er the use of solvent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing sol- vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products

containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol- lowing notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176F

(80C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display R Switch o the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a micro ber

cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT- LCD). R Do not use any other agents.

Head-up Display R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents.

Plastic trim R Clean with a damp micro ber cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-

als. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or

sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim.

Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a micro ber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp

cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, pol-

ishes or waxes.

Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

280 Maintenance and care

Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom-

mended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA- MICA

* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # Do not use solvent-based cleaning

agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the nish.

R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as di erences in

structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color di erences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. What's more, leather is subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change.

Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a

dry cloth. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

% Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and aging dam- age and thus signi cantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g. jeans, can leave discoloration on the leather.

DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp micro ber cloth and 1%

soapy water and allow to dry.

Maintenance and care 281

Emergency Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in the stowage com- partments in the driver and front passenger door. # To remove: pull out safety vest bag by loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the

safety vest.

1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry

6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest

The requirements de ned by the legal standard are only ful lled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. The safety vest must be replaced in the following situations: R The re ective strips are damaged or dirty R The maximum permissible number of washes

is exceeded R The uorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

# Push both sides of warning triangle holder1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.

# Remove warning triangle2.

282 Breakdown assistance

Setting up the warning triangle

# Fold side re ectors1 upwards to form a tri- angle and attach at the top using upper press- stud2.

# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (so -sided) overview

First-aid kit (so sided)1 is on the le or right in the trunk, depending on the vehicle version.

Flat tire Notes on at tires

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a at tire

A at tire severely a ects the driving charac- teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run- at characteristics: # Do not drive with a at tire. # Change the at tire immediately with an

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a quali ed special- ist workshop.

Tires with run- at characteristics: # Observe the information and warning

notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires).

Breakdown assistance 283

In the event of a at tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is possible

to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires) (/ page 284). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the

tire so that it is possible to continue the jour- ney for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 285). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can

make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a break- down (/ page 248). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 326).

% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.

Notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

When driving in emergency mode the handling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the speci ed maximum

speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving

maneuvers as well as driving over obsta- cles (curbs, pot holes, o -road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls # A er driving in emergency mode, have

the rims checked by a quali ed specialist

workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tires (run- at tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How- ever, the tire a ected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- tion with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- tion with an activated tire pressure monitoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage.

284 Breakdown assistance

R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode a er the pressure loss warning: Load condition Driving distance possi-

ble in emergency mode

Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)

Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone at and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure.

TIREFIT kit storage location

The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk oor.

1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire in ation compressor

Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the cargo com- partment oor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire in ation compres-

sor (/ page 285) R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves

You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora- tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 F (-20 C).

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant

The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the

tire (larger than damage previously men- tioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R A er journeys with very low tire pressure

or with at tires # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Breakdown assistance 285

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse o the tire sealant from your skin

immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor-

oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.

# If tire sealant has been swallowed, imme- diately rinse out the mouth thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Change out of any clothes contaminated with tire sealant immediately.

# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire in ation compressor running too long

# Do not run the tire in ation compressor for longer than ten minutes without inter- ruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire in ation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed specialist workshop every ve years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have

entered the tire.

# A x part1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's eld of vision.

# A x part2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.

# Pull plug4 with the cable and hose5 out of the tire in ation compressor housing.

286 Breakdown assistance

# Push the plug of hose5 into ange6 of tire sealant bottle1 until the plug engages.

# Place tire sealant bottle1 head downwards into recess2 of the tire in ation compressor.

# Remove the valve cap from valve7 on the faulty tire.

# Screw lling hose8 onto valve7. # Insert plug4 into a 12 V socket in your vehi-

cle. # Switch on the vehicle.

# Switch on the tire in ation compressor using On/O switch3. The tire is in ated. First, tire sealant is pum- ped into the tire. The pressure may brie y rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch o the tire in ation compressor during this phase! # Let the tire in ation compressor run for a max-

imum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pres- sure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the a ected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera- ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- lene.

If, a er ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch o the tire in ation compressor. # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the lling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for

approximately 33 (10 m). # Pump up the tire again.

A er a maximum of ten minutes the tire pres- sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tire pressure not being achieved

If the speci ed tire pressure is not achieved a er the speci ed time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking characteristics as well as the driv- ing characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

If, a er ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch o the tire in ation compressor.

Breakdown assistance 287

# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the faulty tire.

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit

with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).

* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire seal- ant

A er use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the lling hose.

# Therefore, place the lling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre- sponsible disposal

Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire in a- tion compressor.

# Pull away immediately. # Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes

and check the tire pressure using the tire in ation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tire pressure not being attained

If the speci ed tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel ller ap for values.

# To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire in ation compressor.

288 Breakdown assistance

# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button1 next to manometer2.

# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.

# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire in a- tion compressor. The lling hose stays on the tire sealant bottle.

# Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist work- shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and lling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys- tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers

and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

# In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

# Do not drive on. # Always have work on the battery carried

out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

R Further information on ABS (/ page 165) R Further information on ESP (/ page 166)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes- ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion bat- tery

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec- trostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge

that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

The highly ammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assis- tance.

Breakdown assistance 289

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-

oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

#

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con- tact a quali ed specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron

and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if neces- sary. Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery

charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or con- sult a quali ed specialist workshop to discon- nect the battery.

290 Breakdown assistance

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

All vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over- voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to igniting hydrogen gas

If there is a short circuit or sparks start to form when charging a battery, there is a dan- ger of the hydrogen gas igniting.

# Take care that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

# When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described.

# Always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity when jump starting a vehicle.

# During starting assistance, it is essential to observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat- tery terminals while the engine is run- ning.

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to a mix- ture of explosive gases

A mixture of explosive gases can escape from the battery during charging and jump starting.

# Fire, open ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.

# Make sure that there is su cient ventila- tion.

# Do not stand over the battery.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at tempera- tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before

charging it or performing starting assis- tance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehi- cle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting char-

Breakdown assistance 291

acteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

All vehicles

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts

to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assis- tance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charging

cables with a su cient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps

must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable

is connected to the battery/jump-start con- nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not

come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-

tery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from re and open ames. R Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc-

tions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided

using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch.

R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust sys- tem are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-

ing brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The

transmission is in position j. R The vehicle and all electrical consumers are

switched o . R The hood is open.

292 Breakdown assistance

Example: engine compartment

# Slide cover1 of positive contact2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow.

# Connect positive contact2 on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable.

Always begin with positive contact2 on your own vehicle rst.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.

# Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and ground point3 of your own vehi- cle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery rst.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.

# During the charging process: start the charg- ing process.

# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.

# During starting assistance: before disconnect- ing the jumper cable, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps: # First, remove the jumper cable/charging cable

from ground point3 and the negative termi-

nal of the donor battery, then from positive contact2 and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the con- tacts on your own vehicle rst.

# A er removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover1 of positive contact2.

Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery

(/ page 289).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery

which meets the speci c vehicle require- ments.

Breakdown assistance 293

The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol- ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith- ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith- ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes- Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent

hoses, elbow ttings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con-

nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon-

nected in the same way.

Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods (non plug-in hybrid)

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situa- tions: # During towing # In a car wash

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

Yes, if the steering wheel is xed in the center position

with a steering wheel lock

294 Breakdown assistance

4MATIC vehicles Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

No

To tow with a raised axle: towing should be per- formed by a towing company.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # Observe the notes on the permitted towing

methods (/ page 294). # Make sure that the battery is connected and

charged.

Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started

R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The

automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or j

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or if the display does not show anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 296). A towing vehicle with li ing equipment is required for vehicle transportation.

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis- tances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distan- ces. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)

must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)

must not be exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may

swerve or rollover. # Before tow-starting or towing away,

check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the per- missible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of

the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identi- cation plate (/ page 335).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger

Breakdown assistance 295

door; the automatic transmission otherwise automatically shi s to position j.

# Install the towing eye (/ page 298). # Fasten the towing device.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- tion of the tow bar

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 70).

# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 188). # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shi

the automatic transmission to position i. # Release the electric parking brake.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no lon- ger available in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched o . R The brake system or power steering sys-

tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri-

cal system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is towed away, signi cantly more e ort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can

move freely before towing the vehicle away.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport # Observe the notes on towing away

(/ page 295). # Connect the towing device to the towing eye

in order to load the vehicle. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shi

the automatic transmission to position i.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in posi- tion j in the event of damage to the electri- cal system. To shi to i, provide the on- board electrical system with power (/ page 292).

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

296 Breakdown assistance

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shi the automatic transmission to position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping Sys- tem PLUS)

& WARNING Risk of an accident when trans- porting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS

When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the

transporter. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels

with suitable tensioning straps. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) when trans- porting.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur- ing it incorrectly

# A er loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

# A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels a er loading.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic trans- mission

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi- cle.

Towing eye storage location

The towing eye is located in the stowage space under the trunk oor.

Breakdown assistance 297

Installing and removing the towing eye

# Press the mark on cover1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

# Make sure that cover1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor- rect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch

When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to

tow away or tow start the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch

to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Tow-starting the vehicle

Vehicles with automatic transmission

* NOTE Damage to the automatic transmis- sion due to tow starting

The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission

must not be tow started.

# Vehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- age, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a re. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci-

ed new fuses containing the correct amperage.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their function- ality may be signi cantly impaired.

298 Breakdown assistance

# Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the label. The fuse ratings and further infor- mation to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the trunk (/ page 301).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure

that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure

that the seal of the lid is positioned cor- rectly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched o . R The vehicle is switched o .

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the

driver's side (/ page 299) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit

(/ page 300) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell

(/ page 300) R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of

the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 301)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 298).

Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open

If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windshield wipers

and the vehicle rst if you need to open the hood.

Breakdown assistance 299

# Turn clips2 on cover1 a quarter-turn to counter-clockwise.

# Pull cover1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

# Loosen screws4 and remove fuse box lid3 from the top.

Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned correctly

in cap3.

# Insert lid3 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.

# Fold down lid3 of the fuse box and tighten screws4.

# Insert cover1 on both sides. # Turn clips2 on cover1 a quarter-turn

clockwise. # Close the hood.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 298).

The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # To open and close it, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 298).

300 Breakdown assistance

# To open: open cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

# To close: reinsert cover1.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 298).

# Fold up cover1 in the direction of the arrow.

The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.

Breakdown assistance 301

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteris- tics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires

& WARNING Risk of injury through damaged tires

Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of

damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insu cient tire tread

Insu cient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the

tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: in (3 mm) R M+S tires: in (4 mm) # For safety reasons, replace the tires

before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu- larly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving o - road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 303).

R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the

tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is in (3 mm) and for winter tires in (4 mm).

Six marks1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approximately in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

302 Wheels and tires

Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rectly installed snow chains

If you have installed snow chains on the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never install snow chains on the front

wheels. # Only install snow chains on the rear

wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to components of the vehi- cle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains

If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo- nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear

wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain

wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain infor- mation about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that

have been speci cally approved for your vehi- cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum per-

missible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not

use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains are

installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 198).

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away (/ page 167). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - cient or excessive tire pressure

Underin ated or overin ated tires pose in par- ticular the following risks: R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or

unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the

steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

# Comply with the recommended tire pres- sures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regu- larly: R Monthly R When the load changes R Before embarking on a longer journey

Wheels and tires 303

R If operating conditions change, e.g. o - road driving

# Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and

thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure

Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also su er from irregular wear, which can signi cantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.

Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire malfunctions as a result of overheating

R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased fuel consumption

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also su er from irregular wear, which can signi cantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.

Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage

& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea- ted pressure drop in the tires

The wheels, valves or tires could be damaged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or

the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

You can nd information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the

Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 309). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel

ller ap (/ page 305).

Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 316). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not

304 Wheels and tires

permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pres- sure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out

of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: You can also check the tire pressure using the on- board computer. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can a ect the ride comfort.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita- ble accessories on tire valves

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and

malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve

caps speci cally approved by Mercedes- Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel ller ap. % The data shown in the images is example

data.

If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load con- dition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are de ned in the table for di erent num- bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may di er from this.

Wheels and tires 305

Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diam- eter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 317). R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 309) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 316)

Checking the tire pressure manually # Read the tire pressure recommended for the

current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pres- sure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.

# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.

# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom-

mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

# If the tire pressure is higher than the recom- mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 303) R Tire pressure table (/ page 305) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 309)

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function of the tire pressure monitoring system

& DANGER Risk of accident due to incorrect tire pressure

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and in ated to the in ation pressure recommen- ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehi- cle placard or tire in ation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a di erent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire in ation pressure label, you should deter- mine the proper tire in ation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signi cantly under-in ated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and in ate them to the proper pres- sure. Driving on a signi cantly under-in ated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-in ation also reduces fuel e ciency and tire tread life, and may a ect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- ers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in ation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

306 Wheels and tires

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will ash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 307).

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 392) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 414). The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pres- sure to the recommended cold tire pressure suita- ble for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem will automatically update the new reference values a er you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val- ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem manually (/ page 308).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign

object penetrating the tire, for example R There is a malfunction caused by another

radio signal source

Checking the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of

the individual wheels:

R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes

Wheels and tires 307

R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

# Compare the tire pressure with the recom- mended tire pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 305). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tires (/ page 303).

% The values displayed in the on-board com- puter may deviate from those of the tire pres- sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure.

Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 303).

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed.

R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Refer- ence Values message is shown in the Instru- ment Display.

# To restart, press Touch Control on the le - hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the Instrument Display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. A er you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the speci ed range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

Be sure to also pay attention to the following rela- ted topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 303)

Tire pressure loss warning system

Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign

object penetrating the tire, for example R An even pressure loss on more than one tire

occurs

The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains R When adopting a very sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or sudden acceleration R Driving with a high load

308 Wheels and tires

The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 303) R Display messages about the tires

(/ page 392)

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on all wheels.

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or

newly installed.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on the Touch Control on the

le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Control System Active Restart message is shown in the display.

# To begin restart, press the Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the display.

# Select Yes. # To con rm restart, press the Touch Control on

the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the display. A er you have driven for a few minutes, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressures of all the tires.

Be sure to also pay attention to the following rela- ted topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 303)

Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information placard

& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa- ded tires

Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris- tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the

permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding

the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

Wheels and tires 309

1 Tire and Loading Information placard

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats2 according to

the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.

R Maximum permissible load3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. R Recommended tire pressure1 for cold tires.

The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads

on the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 335). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres-

sure table (/ page 305).

Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load

(/ page 310) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 303).

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pursuant to

310 Wheels and tires

the "National Tra c and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.

# (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

# (4): The resulting gure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be ve 150 lb pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

# (5): Determine the combined weight of lug- gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa-

ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula- ted in Step 4.

# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer- hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any ques- tions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum per- missible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not excee- ded. Details can be found on the vehicle identi - cation plate. # Have your loaded vehicle including driver,

occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identi cation plate.

Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the maxi-

mum load (/ page 311) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 309) R Tire pressure table (/ page 305) R Vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 335)

Calculation example for determining the maximum load

The following table shows examples of how to cal- culate total and load capacities with varying seat- ing con gurations and di erent numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 309). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Wheels and tires 311

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occu- pants)

5 1

Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3

Front: 1

Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)

Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

312 Wheels and tires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information plac- ard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)

Wheels and tires 313

Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling

1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN)

Tire Identi cation Number 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 316) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 316)

5 Manufacturer 6 Tire characteristics (/ page 317) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 317) 8 Tire name

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Tire Quality Grading

In accordance with the US Department of Trans- portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per- formance factors:

1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

% The classi cation is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.

Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci ed govern- ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2\) times as

314 Wheels and tires

well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signi cantly from the norm due to var- iations in driving habits, service practices and dif- ferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction grade

& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade- quate traction

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive

at a speed to suit the prevailing tra c and weather conditions.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin

# Avoid wheelspin.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci ed govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature grade

& WARNING Risk of accident from tire over- heating and tire failure

Excessive speed, underin ation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi- ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the

tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci ed indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manu- facturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.

Wheels and tires 315

% The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identi cation number to iden- tify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire sym-

bol marks1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identi cation code: manufac-

turer identi cation code2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 321). R Tire size: identi er3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code4 can be used

by the manufacturer as a code to describe speci c characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date5

provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the cal- endar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).

Information on the maximum tire load

% The data shown in the image is example data. Maximum tire load1 is the maximum permissi- ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci- ed load limit. The maximum permissible load can

be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (/ page 309).

Speci cations for maximum tire pressure

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Never exceed maximum tire pressure1 speci- ed for the tire. Always observe the recommen-

ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 305).

316 Wheels and tires

Information on tire characteristics

% The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall1 and under tire tread2.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the speci ed tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- age and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any quali ed specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires 317

First letter(s)1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to

European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US

manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu-

facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with

high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.

Aspect ratio3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in percent (tire height divided by tire width).

Tire code4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above

149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)

Rim diameter5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim ange). The rim diameter is speci ed in inches (in).

Load-bearing index6: Numerical code that speci es the maximum load- bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corresponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehi- cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci ed load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and

Loading Information placard (/ page 309) R Maximum tire load (/ page 316) R Load index

Speed rating7: Speci es the approved maximum speed of the tire.

% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Summer tires Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

318 Wheels and tires

Index Speed rating

ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h)

R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). R If your tire code4 includes "ZR" and there is

no speed rating7, nd out what the maxi- mum speed is from the tire manufacturer. R If load-bearing index6 and speed rating7

are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To nd out the maximum speed, ask the tire man-

ufacturer.

All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Winter tires bear the i snow ake symbol and ful ll the requirements of the Rubber Manufactur- ers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.

Load index8: R No speci cation given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein-

forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire

R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a cer- tain pressure

De nition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber-coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-marked tires ful ll the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehicle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.

Wheels and tires 319

to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following speci cations from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommended tire pressure is the tire pressure speci ed for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the factory. The tire and information table contains the recom- mended tire pressures for cold tires, the maxi- mum permissible load and the maximum permissi- ble vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equip- ment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identi cation. It speci es the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle includ- ing fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories instal- led, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side.

Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maxi- mum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maxi- mum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This speci es the load-bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air condi- tioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

320 Wheels and tires

Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is speci ed in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours with- out direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim.

Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identi cation Number): a unique identi - cation number which can be used by a tire manu- facturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from friction between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the

tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat positions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nominal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multi- plied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect wheel and tire dimensions

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are instal- led, the service brakes or components in the

Wheels and tires 321

brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with

ones that ful ll the speci cations of the original part.

For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type

For tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the speci ed tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- age and to the tires bursting.

# Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.

# Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved

For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run- at tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-

tain AMG tires)

Otherwise, certain properties, such as han- dling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely a ec-

ted. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tires

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retrea- ded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar- anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no

information about their previous usage.

322 Wheels and tires

* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tires being damaged when driving over obstacles increases. # Avoid obstacles or drive especially care-

fully. # Reduce your speed when driving over

curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.

# Avoid particularly high curbs.

* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes

Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on at surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a quali ed

specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, causing per- manent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use

i M+S tires.

Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved acces- sories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high per- formance tires

The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running tem- perature. # Switch on the ESP and adapt your driv-

ing style accordingly. # Use i M+S tires at outside tempera-

tures of less than 50 F (10 C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur-

pose.

Wheels and tires 323

Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in

certain regions and areas of operation can be highly bene cial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one

axle (le and right). It is only permissible to install a di erent wheel size in the event of a at tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem: All installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use win-

ter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for

the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the

rst 60 miles (100 km). R Replace the tires a er six years at the latest,

regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not feature

run- at characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tires that do not feature run- at characteristics, e.g. winter tires.

For more information on wheels and tires, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 303)

R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 309) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 317) R Tire pressure table (/ page 305) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

(/ page 331)

Notes on rotating the wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through di erent wheel sizes

Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the

wheels and tires are of the same dimen- sions.

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels di er: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder

324 Wheels and tires

R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire

Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the inter- vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is main- tained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 326).

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease

or fuel.

Overview of the tire-change tool kit

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehi- cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed spe- cialist workshop. Required tire-changing tools may include, for example: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt

The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag1 in the trunk.

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be located at other positions in the trunk.

The tool bag contains: R Jack R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack

Wheels and tires 325

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level

ground. R The required tire-change tool kit is available.

% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire- change tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist workshop to nd out about suitable tools.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

position. # Shi the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the

normal vehicle level (/ page 198). # Switch o the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the

front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 326).

# Raise the vehicle (/ page 327).

Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change

(/ page 326).

Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub

cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

# To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise.

# Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.

Aluminum hub cap

# To remove: position socket2 from the tire- change tool kit on hub cap1.

# Position wheel wrench3 on socket2. # Using wheel wrench3, turn hub cap1

counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in

reverse order. % Speci ed tightening torque: 18 lb- (25 Nm).

326 Wheels and tires

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel

change (/ page 326). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been

removed (/ page 326).

Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been

approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehi- cle. R The jack is only designed for raising and hold-

ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and

non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti-

cally under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the vehi-

cle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the

electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk

lid.

# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws com- pletely.

Wheels and tires 327

Position of jack support points

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. The base of

the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jack-

ing up the vehicle at the jack support points.

# Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

# Position support2 of jack4 on jack sup- port point1.

# Turn ratchet3 clockwise until support2 sits completely on jack support point1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Turn ratchet3 until the tire is raised a maxi- mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 329).

328 Wheels and tires

Removing a wheel

Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 327).

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.

# Screw alignment bolt1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com- pletely.

# Remove the wheel.

Installing a new wheel

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 321).

For tires with a speci ed direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the cor- rect direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-

ment bolt and push it on.

Wheels and tires 329

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 321).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.

* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the rst wheel bolt

If the wheel has too much play when screwing in the rst wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel rmly against the wheel

hub when screwing in the rst wheel bolt.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are nger-tight.

# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is nger-

tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 330).

Lowering the vehicle a er a wheel change

Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed

(/ page 329). # To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto

the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb- (80 Nm).

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with the speci ed tightening torque of 111 lb- (150 Nm).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

330 Wheels and tires

# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehi- cle. Contact a quali ed specialist work- shop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.

# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.

% The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

# Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys- tem: Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 309).

# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: Restart the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem (/ page 308).

Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions

The wheel or tire sizes and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emer- gency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi - cantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency

spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers in size.

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel brie y.

# Do not deactivate ESP. # Have the emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a di erent size replaced at the nearest quali ed specialist work-

shop. The new wheel must have the cor- rect dimensions.

% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.

Observe the following notes on installing an emer- gency spare wheel: R The maximum permissible speed with an

emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel with

snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six

years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Check the tire pressure of the emergency

spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary.

% The speci ed tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.

Wheels and tires 331

% Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warning sys- tem: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes a er an emergency spare wheel is installed, the sys- tem may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 303) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 309) R Tire pressure table (/ page 305) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 321) R Installing an emergency spare wheel

(/ page 326)

332 Wheels and tires

Notes on technical data

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further infor- mation from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter.

Vehicle electronics Two-way radios

Notes on installing two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retro t- ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operat- ing safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particu- lar: R The two-way radio is not connected to an

exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor-

rectly or is not a low-re ection antenna.

This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-re ection exterior antenna

installed at a quali ed specialist work- shop.

# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low- re ection exterior antenna.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instruc- tions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out-

put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.

Technical data 333

1 Rear fenders

On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos- est to the center of the road. Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of a ermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.

If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.

Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission out- put Frequency band Maximum transmis-

sion output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

(30 W)

4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz

(15 W)

2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz

(25 W)

Frequency band Maximum transmis- sion output

trunked radio system/ Tetra 380 - 460 MHz

(10 W)

70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz

(15 W)

Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)

(10 W)

The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmission

output of up to 100 mW R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in

the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

334 Technical data

There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol- lowing frequency bands: R Trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G

Regulatory radio identi cation and notes Regulatory radio identi cation of small compo- nents

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi- cle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Inter- net and in the app.

Regulatory radio identi cation Indonesia

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi- cle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation Indone- sia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehi- cle, on the Internet and in the app.

% These are not small components. Information about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation of small components".

Information on user separation distances

Information on user separation distances of wire- less vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "User separation distances" in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Inter- net, and in the app.

Further component-speci c information

Further component-speci c information can be found using the key phrase "further component- speci c information" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app.

Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine num- ber overview

Vehicle identi cation plate

Technical data 335

Vehicle identi cation plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)

Vehicle identi cation plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)

The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- pants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).

Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

VIN below the front right-hand seat

1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identi cation number) 2 Floor covering

336 Technical data

Additional plates

1 Plate with information about emissions test- ing, including con rmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California

2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 3 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as a label

at the lower edge of the windshield

Operating uids Notes on operating uids

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating uids harmful to your health

Operating uids may be poisonous and harm- ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original contain-

ers when using, storing or disposing of operating uids.

# Always store operating uids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat- ing uids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating uids

Incorrect disposal of operating uids can cause considerable damage to the environ- ment. # Dispose of operating uids in an environ-

mentally responsible manner.

Operating uids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake uid R Windshield washer uid R Climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

Technical data 337

The operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identi ed by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating uids: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper-

ating Fluids by entering the designation - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a quali ed specialist workshop

& WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly ammable. # Fire, open ames, smoking and creating

sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refueling, switch o

the vehicle and, if installed, the station- ary heater.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during

the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the fol- lowing fuel types: R Unleaded premium grade gasoline R E85 fuel R A mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded premium

grade gasoline

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identi ed by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel ller ap.

Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may di er from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel ller ap.

Fuel

Notes on fuel quality for vehicles with a gasoline engine Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 337).

338 Technical data

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by vol- ume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

If the available fuel is not su ciently low in sulfur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number speci ed in the information label in the fuel ller ap (/ page 154). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with premium-grade unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with regular unleaded gasoline with at least 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower RON.

* NOTE Premature engine wear through unleaded regular gasoline

Impairment of the longevity and performance of the engine. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavail- able and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline:

# Only ll the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and re ll as soon as possible with unleaded premium grade gasoline.

# Do not drive at the maximum design speed.

# Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm.

Further information on fuel is available at the fol- lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a quali ed specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 337).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

Technical data 339

# Only add cleaning additives recommen- ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand- name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have su cient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.

Tank content and reserve fuel

Total capacity and reserve fuel tank Model Total capacity

All models 17.4 gal (66.0 liters)

Model Of which reserve

All models 1.8 gal (7.0 liters)

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 337).

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor- rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives

# Do not use engine oils or oil lters other than those which meet the speci cations necessary for the prescribed service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed a er the

prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Quality and capacity of engine oil

Engine oil speci cations Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval

All models 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71

229.72*

* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con- sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each

340 Technical data

case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil speci ca- tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE vis- cosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, includ- ing the oil lter.

Engine oil lling capacity Model Capacity

E 450 10.0 US qt (9.5 liters)

E 450 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters)

Notes on brake uid

Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 337).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake system

The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking e ect to be impaired. # Have the brake uid renewed at the

speci ed intervals.

Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a quali- ed specialist workshop.

Only use a brake uid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 337).

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before

adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out

next to the ller opening. # Thoroughly clean o any antifreeze from

component parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- ant

# Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection.

Information on coolant is available at the fol- lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for

Operating Fluids 320.1

Technical data 341

- At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a quali ed specialist workshop

* NOTE Overheating at high outside temper- atures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not su ciently protected against overheating and corrosion at high out- side temperatures. # Only use coolant approved by Mercedes-

Benz. # Observe the instructions in the

Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper- ating Fluids 320.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down

to about -35F (-37C))

R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49F (-45C))

Coolant capacity

Coolant (engine) Model Capacity

All models 13.7 US qt (13.0 liters)

Notes on windshield washer uid

Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 337).

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly am- mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the ller opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer uid

Unsuitable windshield washer uid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer uid which is

also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer uids

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- terFit with other windshield washer u- ids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other- wise, the ll level sensor may be triggered errone- ously. Recommended windshield washer uid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- tion on the antifreeze container.

342 Technical data

Mix washer uid with windshield washer uid all year round.

Refrigerant

Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 337).

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant

If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli- mate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R1234yf refrigerant.

* NOTE Damage to the climate control sys- tem due to incorrect refrigerant compres- sor oil

# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a di erent refriger- ant compressor oil.

Work on the climate control system may be car- ried out only by a quali ed specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys- tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig- erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.

Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant lling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number

5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refriger- ant used

6 Refrigerant type

Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant lling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refriger-

ant used 6 Refrigerant type

Technical data 343

Symbols1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R The need to have service work carried out at a

quali ed specialist workshop only

Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil

Capacity Model Refrigerant

All models 20.8 0.4 oz (590 10 g)

Model PAG oil

All models 4.9 0.4 oz (140 10 g)

Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions

The heights speci ed may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load

R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Height when opened Model 1 Height

when opened

All models

Vehicle dimensions E 450

Vehicle length 190.4 in (4835 mm)

Vehicle width including outside mirrors

80.9 in (2055 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2873 mm)

Vehicle height 56.3 in (1429 mm)

Vehicle height when opening/ closing the roof

79.1 in (2009 mm)

Turning radius 37.30 (11.37 m)

344 Technical data

Vehicle dimensions E 450 4MATIC

Vehicle length 190.4 in (4835 mm)

Vehicle width including outside mirrors

80.9 in (2055 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2873 mm)

Vehicle height 56.6 in (1437 mm)

Vehicle height when opening/ closing the roof

79.4 in (2017 mm)

Turning radius 38.09 (11.61 m)

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the speci- ed vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the curb

weight and reduce the payload. R You will nd vehicle-speci c weight informa-

tion on the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 335).

Technical data 345

Display messages Introduction

Notes about display messages Display messages appear on the instrument dis- play. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim- pli ed in the Operator's Manual and may di er from the symbols on the instrument display. The instrument display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes- sages and follow the additional notes in the Oper- ator's Manual. For some display messages, symbols will also be shown: R Further information R Hide display message

With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the le or right. Pressing displays further information on

the media display. Press the symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the back buttonG or the le -hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The instrument display will show these display messages permanently until the cause of the dis- play message has been recti ed.

Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the instrument display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip-

ing upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To exit the message memory: press the back buttonG.

346 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the head airbag malfunctioning If the head airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not deploy at all in the event of an accident. # Have the head airbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 347

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Airbag Dis- abled See Operator's Man- ual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 46). # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front

passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

348 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is ena- bled

If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena- bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 46). # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 349

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Obtain a New Key

* Have the SmartKey replaced. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 66).

Key Not Detected (white display message)

* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 138).

350 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Key Not Detected (red dis- play message)

* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 138).

Don't Forget Your Key

* A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Being Initialized Please Wait

* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new SmartKey. # Wait until processing is complete.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 351

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Place the Key in the Marked Space See Opera- tor's Manual

* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 138).

So top

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

K While stationary, apply the brakes before operating the soft top.

* The vehicle is stationary and you try to open or close the so top. # Depress the brake pedal. # Operate the so top operation again until the so top opens or closes completely.

K Soft Top Operable Only up to 37 mph

* If you drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h) you cannot open or close the so top. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). # Fully open or close the so top.

352 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

K Soft Top Lowering

* The so top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depressuring. # Fully open or close the so top.

K Open/Close Soft Top Com- pletely

* The so top is not locked. If you drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h) you cannot open or close the so top. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). # Fully open or close the so top.

K 12 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. # Start the vehicle.

J Close Trunk Separator

* The trunk partition is open. # Close the trunk partition.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 353

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

: Check Left Low Beam (example)

* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes

in the light are faulty.

: Malfunction See Opera- tors Manual

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

: Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative

* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

354 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

: Active Headlamps Inopera- tive

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

: Switch On Headlamps

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or position.

: Switch Off Lights

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the position.

: Intell. Light System Inoper- ative

* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 355

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 117). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 118). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.

356 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually.

Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning

* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting

* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the SmartKey with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12V bat-

tery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 357

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* The Head-up Display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R Malfunctions in the power supply R Signal interference # Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Head-up Display Inopera- tive

* The Head-up Display has an internal error. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

358 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Opera- tor's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

C * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.

M * The hood is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Close the hood.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 359

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N * The trunk lid is open.

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

# Close the trunk lid.

_ Front Left Seat Backrest Not Locked (example)

* The seat backrest of the corresponding front seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Check Washer Fluid

* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer uid (/ page 272).

Wiper Malfunctioning * The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

360 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Restart the vehicle.

If the display message still appears: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop but- ton for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times.

* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching o the vehicle while driving (/ page 137).

Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual

* The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 361

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insu cient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant.

# Add coolant (/ page 271). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine Off

* The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situa- tions may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the re service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

362 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the

coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

* There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the

coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

8 Fuel Level Low

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

8 Gas Cap Loose

* The fuel ller cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel ller cap. # If the fuel ller cap was already properly closed: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only Shift to 'P' when Vehi- cle is Stationary

* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.

To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine

* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission posi- tion. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position.

Apply Brake to Shift to D or R

* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k.

Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal.

364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Select transmission position k.

Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away

* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.

N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away

* Neutral i has been selected while the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.

Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer

* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission

position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required

* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling

* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion (white display message)

* Vehicles with automatic transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion (red display message)

* Vehicles with automatic transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Opera- tor's Manual

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 162).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 162). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 161). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 162).

To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con- tinues to ash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.

368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: # Switch o the vehicle.

The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 162).

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,

release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 162).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

* The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is ashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 161). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 162). # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.

370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake

* The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o . # Switch on the vehicle.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level

* There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not add brake uid.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Off

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 168).

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper- ative

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 169). # If necessary, take a break.

h - - - mph

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 172).

Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 171).

- - - mph

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 175).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Suspended

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 173).

Off

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 175).

Active Distance Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 173). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Active Distance Assist Inop- erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on.

374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist Now Available

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 175).

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 180). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tire pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist Inop- erative

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Steering Asst. Cur- rently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

Active Steering Assist is available once more. Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 182).

# Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 180).

You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions.

Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 179). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.

376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on

Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- tive

* Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 193). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist Inopera- tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 193). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or

378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 195). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on

Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Temporarily Unavailable Sensors are Dirty

* Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer- ing and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 163). # Restart the vehicle.

380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted

* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on the inside

of the windshield during cold times of year in particular.

% This condensation on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer- ing and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 163). # Restart the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph

* AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low

* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.

The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a

higher vehicle level if possible.

382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 198).

Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.

Lowering

* The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons: R You have selected a di erent drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.

Vehicle Rising

* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle Rising Please Wait

* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Drive More Slowly

* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched o .

384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care- fully.

! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-

fully.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Brake Assist Func- tions Limited See Opera- tor's Manual

* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti- ally available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRESAFE PLUS

Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially availa- ble. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

G Inoperative

* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction- ing. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Device Detected at Diag- nostics Connection See Operator's Manual

* The vehicle functions for malfunction detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 26). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# 12 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual

* The vehicle is o and the charge level is too low. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.

To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the vehicle running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

* If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# See Operator's Manual

* The 12 V battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor's Manual

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch o the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running

* The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

48 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual

* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted. # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery

* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. A er a few minutes, the Engine Can Now Be Started display message will be shown on the instrument display. # Start the vehicle. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery a er disconnecting the charger from

the vehicle.

If the Engine Can Now Be Started display message does not appear a er a few minutes: # Try to start the vehicle. # If the vehicle does not start, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual

* The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with su cient charge output to the jump-start connection

point of the 12 V battery (/ page 292). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.

Engine Can Now Be Started * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tire pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Cur- rently Unavailable

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed. # Drive on.

Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- tive

* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insu cient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- erative No Wheel Sensors

* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing

* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.

h Check Tires

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped signi cantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 303) and the tires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h Please Correct Tire Pres- sure

* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the di erence in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 308).

h Warning Tire Malfunction

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tire R The tires can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a at tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible

speed with a at MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on at tires.

Notes in the event of a at tire (/ page 283). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tires.

394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The a ected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the

tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The a ected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Tire pressure loss warning system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon * Canada only:

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a signi cant loss of pressure.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 303) and the tires. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 308).

Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 308).

Run Flat Indicator Inopera- tive

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level when next refueling.

Add engine oil (/ page 270). Notes on engine oil (/ page 340).

5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.

# When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 270).

Notes on engine oil (/ page 340).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level

* The engine oil level is too high.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

* The engine oil level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch o the vehicle. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 270). # Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil (/ page 340).

398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine

* The oil pressure is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient oil pressure # Avoid driving with insu cient oil pressure.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch o the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn- ing lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behav- ior is non-critical. These indicator and warning

lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or ash a er the vehicle has been started or dur- ing a journey.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399

Instrument display

Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may di er from the example shown.

Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 401) Seat belt (/ page 401) Power steering (/ page 402) Coolant temperature (/ page 403) ; Check Engine (/ page 403) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 403)

8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap loca- tion indicator (/ page 403)

F USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 407)

! Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 407)

! Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 407)

USA: Recuperative Brake System (/ page 407)

J Canada: brakes (yellow) (/ page 407)

$ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 407) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 407) L Distance warning (/ page 410) Active Brake Assist (/ page 410) Active Brake Assist (/ page 410) AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 410) DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL

(/ page 410) ! ABS (/ page 411)

ESP (/ page 411) ESP OFF (/ page 411) h Tire pressure monitoring system

(/ page 414) T Parking lights (/ page 112) L Low beam (/ page 112) K High beam (/ page 113) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 113) R Rear fog light (/ page 112)

400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 Restraint system warning lamp

* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the instrument display. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Seat belt warning lamp ashes

* The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Seat belt warning lamp lights up

*The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Power steering warning lamp (red)

* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not

continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the instrument display.

402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Coolant warning lamp (red)

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the re service.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. Do not continue driving.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Note the messages on the instrument display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 271). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the

coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

Coolant warning lamp (yel- low)

* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

; Engine diagnosis warning lamp

* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Electrical malfunction warn- ing lamp

* The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

8 Fuel reserve warning lamp ashes

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel ller cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel ller cap.

If the fuel ller cap has already been closed correctly: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F Electric parking brake indi- cator lamp (red) (USA only)

! Electric parking brake indi- cator lamp (red) (Canada only)

! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)

J Brakes warning lamp (yel- low) (Canada only)

*The yellow warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brake warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the vehicle is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ Brake warning lamp (USA only)

J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)

* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected. R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not

continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not add brake uid.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

L Warning lamp for distance warning function

* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 184).

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 184).

410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL. A malfunction has occurred in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! ABS warning lamp

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o .

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

ESP warning lamp ashes

* The yellow ESP warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 166). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

ESP warning lamp lights up

* The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ESP OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated

ESP does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning. # Have ESP checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 166).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413

Tire pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes

*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insu cient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415

1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC

Function................................................ 154 12 V battery

see On-board electrical system battery (12 V) 12 V socket

see Socket (12 V) 48 V on-board electrical system

Operating safety...................................... 23 360 Camera

Function................................................ 202

A A/C function

Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 130 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- media system)....................................... 131

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).................... 165 Acceleration

see Kickdown Accident and Breakdown Management

Mercedes me connect........................... 251

Acoustic locking veri cation signal Activating/deactivating............................ 65

Active Blind Spot Assist Brake application................................... 194 Function................................................ 193 System limitations.................................. 193

Active Brake Assist Function/notes...................................... 184 Setting................................................... 188

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 182 Active Lane Change Assist..................... 183 Calling up a speed................................. 175 Function................................................ 173 Increasing/decreasing the speed........... 175 Route-based speed adaptation............... 178 Storing a speed...................................... 175 Switching o /deactivating..................... 175 Switching on/activating......................... 175 System limitations.................................. 173

Active Emergency Stop Assist...................... 182 Active headlamps......................................... 115 Active Lane Change Assist

Activating/deactivating.......................... 184

Function................................................ 183 Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating.......................... 197 Activating/deactivating the warning....... 197 Function................................................ 195 Setting the sensitivity............................. 197 System limits......................................... 195

Active Parking Assist Automatic braking function.................... 214 Exiting a parking space.......................... 213 Function................................................ 210 Maneuvering brake function................... 215 Parking.................................................. 211 Pausing.................................................. 213 System limitations.................................. 210

Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS

Active Speed Limit Assist Display................................................... 177 Function................................................ 177

Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 182 Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 182 Active Lane Change Assist..................... 183

416 Index

Function................................................ 180 System limits......................................... 180

Active Tra c Jam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 180 Function................................................ 179

Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 118 Function................................................ 117

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Function................................................ 118 Switching on/o .................................... 119

Additives Engine oil............................................... 340 Fuel....................................................... 339

Additives (engine oil) see Additives

Additives (fuel) see Fuel

ADS PLUS damping system see AIR BODY CONTROL

A er-sales service see ASSYST PLUS

Air bag Reduced protection.................................. 44

AIR BODY CONTROL Setting................................................... 198 Suspension............................................ 197

Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. 130

Air distribution Setting................................................... 129 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 131

Air freshener system see Fragrance system

Air inlet see Air-water duct

Air pressure see Tire pressure

Air suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL

Air vents Adjusting (front)..................................... 134 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 134

Adjusting the AIRSCARF vents................ 135 Air vents

see Air vents Air-conditioning system

see Climate control Air-recirculation mode.................................. 132 Air-water duct

Keeping free.......................................... 273 Airbag

Activation................................................ 36 Automatic co-driver airbag shuto ............ 45 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 42 Head airbag............................................. 42 Installation locations................................ 42 Knee airbag............................................. 42 Overview.................................................. 42 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 46 Protection................................................ 43 Side airbag.............................................. 42

AIRCAP Activating................................................. 78 Deactivating............................................. 78

Air ow Setting................................................... 129

Index 417

AIRSCARF Activating/deactivating............................ 97 Adjusting the outlets.............................. 135

Alarm see Panic alarm

Alarm system see ATA (anti-the alarm system)

All-wheel drive see 4MATIC

Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 120

Android Auto see Smartphone integration

Animals Pets in the vehicle.................................... 63

Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chains see Snow chains

Anti-the protection Immobilizer.............................................. 85

Anti-the protection see ATA (anti-the alarm system)

Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Apple CarPlay see Smartphone integration

Assistance systems see Driving safety system

ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods................ 267 Displaying the service due date.............. 266 Function/notes...................................... 266 Regular maintenance work..................... 266 Special service requirements................. 266

ATA (anti-the alarm system) Deactivating the alarm............................. 86 Function.................................................. 86

ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 169 Setting................................................... 171 System limitations.................................. 169

Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Quali ed specialist workshop

Authorized workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop

Automatic co-driver airbag shuto Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 45

Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Automatic driving lights................................ 113 Automatic engine start

see ECO start/stop function Automatic engine stop

see ECO start/stop function Automatic front passenger airbag shuto

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 46 Automatic mirror folding function

Activating/deactivating.......................... 128 Automatic seat adjustment

Setting..................................................... 93 Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 150 Drive program display............................ 149 Drive programs...................................... 148

418 Index

DYNAMIC SELECT switch....................... 148 Engaging drive position.......................... 152 Engaging reverse gear............................ 151 Kickdown............................................... 153 Manual gearshi ing................................ 152 Selecting park position........................... 152 Steering wheel paddle shi ers................ 152 Transmission position display................. 150 Transmission positions........................... 150

B Back seat

see Seats Bad weather light......................................... 116 Bag hook..................................................... 107 BAS (Brake Assist System)........................... 166 Battery (SmartKey)

Replacing................................................. 66 Battery (vehicle)

Charging (Remote Online)...................... 138 Notes..................................................... 289 Notes (starting assistance and charg- ing)........................................................ 291

Belt see Seat belt

Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 195 Function................................................ 193 System limitations.................................. 193

Blower see Climate control

Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake uid Notes..................................................... 341

Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 168

Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 165 Active Brake Assist................................. 184 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 166 Breaking-in notes................................... 139 Driving tips............................................ 141 EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 168 HOLD function....................................... 168

Limited braking e ect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 141 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 139

Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Breakdown Changing a wheel................................... 326 Overview of the help functions................. 16 Roadside Assistance................................ 22 Tow-starting........................................... 298 Towing away.......................................... 295 Transporting the vehicle......................... 296

Breakdown see Flat tire

Breaking-in notes......................................... 139 Buttons

Steering wheel....................................... 219

C Calls

Mercedes me......................................... 248

Index 419

Camera Information............................................ 163

Camera see 360 Camera see Dashcam see Rear view camera

Car key see SmartKey

Car wash see Care

Car wash (care)............................................ 273 Car-to-X-Communication

Displaying hazard warnings.................... 241 Care

Air-water duct........................................ 273 Automatic car wash............................... 273 Carpet................................................... 280 Decorative foil........................................ 275 Display................................................... 280 Exterior lighting...................................... 278 Folding wind screen............................... 278 Head-up Display..................................... 280 Headliner............................................... 280 Paint...................................................... 275

Plastic trim............................................ 280 Power washer........................................ 274 Real wood/trim elements...................... 280 Rear view camera................................... 278 Seat belt................................................ 280 Seat cover............................................. 280 Sensors................................................. 278 So top................................................. 276 Steering wheel....................................... 280 Surround view camera........................... 278 Tailpipes................................................ 278 Washing by hand.................................... 274 Wheels/rims.......................................... 278 Wind de ector....................................... 277 Wind screen........................................... 277 Windows................................................ 278 Wiper blades.......................................... 278

Cargo tie-down rings.................................... 106 Carpet (Care)............................................... 280 Change of address......................................... 22 Change of ownership...................................... 22 Changing a wheel

Preparation............................................ 326 Raising the vehicle................................. 327

Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Changing gears Manually................................................ 152

Changing hub caps....................................... 326 Charging

Mobile phone (wireless)......................... 109 On-board electrical system battery (12 V).................................................... 292 USB port................................................ 109

Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL) Setting................................................... 198

Child safety lock Rear side windows................................... 62

Child seat Attaching (notes)...................................... 54 Basic instructions.................................... 50 Front-passenger seat (notes).................... 60 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing)................ 55 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 51 Securing on the front passenger seat....... 60 Securing on the rear seat......................... 58 Top Tether................................................ 57

420 Index

Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 51 Basic instructions.................................... 50 Special seat belt retractor........................ 55

Chock Storage location..................................... 325

Chock see Chock

City lighting.................................................. 116 Cleaning

see Care Climate control

Activating/deactivating.......................... 130 Activating/deactivating the A/C func- tion (control panel)................................. 130 Activating/deactivating the A/C func- tion (MBUX multimedia system).............. 131 Activating/deactivating the synchro- nization function (control panel)............. 131 Activating/deactivating the synchro- nization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 132 Air-recirculation mode............................ 132 Automatic control.................................. 131

Calling up the air conditioning menu....... 130 Climate style function............................ 131 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control....................................... 129 Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control....................................... 129 Defrosting the windshield....................... 129 Filling capacity for PAG oil...................... 344 Front air vents........................................ 134 Inserting/removing the acon (fra- grance system)...................................... 133 Ionization............................................... 132 Note...................................................... 129 Rear air vents......................................... 134 Refrigerant............................................. 343 Refrigerant lling capacity...................... 344 Removing condensation from the win- dows...................................................... 132 Residual heat......................................... 132 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 130 Setting the air distribution...................... 129 Setting the air ow.................................. 129 Setting the climate style......................... 131 Setting the fragrance system.................. 132 Setting the vehicle interior tempera- ture....................................................... 129

Switching the rear window heater on/o ................................................... 129 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 83

Climate style Function................................................ 131 Setting................................................... 131

Co-driver airbag shuto see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto

Cockpit Overview.................................................... 6

Co ee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST

Combination switch..................................... 113 Component-speci c information................... 335 Computer

see On-board computer Connecting the parcel net............................ 108 Convenience closing...................................... 84 Convenience opening..................................... 83 Coolant (engine)

Capacity................................................ 342

Index 421

Level check............................................ 271 Notes..................................................... 341

Cooling see Climate control

Copyrights License.................................................... 34 Trademarks.............................................. 34

Cornering light............................................. 115 Cross tra c (warning)

see Maneuvering assistance Cross Tra c Alert........................................ 215 Crosswind Assist

Function/notes...................................... 167 Cruise control

Activating............................................... 172 Buttons.................................................. 172 Calling up a speed................................. 172 Deactivating........................................... 172 Function................................................ 171 Requirements:....................................... 172 Selecting............................................... 172 Setting a speed...................................... 172 Storing a speed...................................... 172 System limitations.................................. 171

Customer Assistance Center (CAC)................ 28 Customer Relations Department..................... 28

D Dashboard

see Cockpit Dashcam

Notes..................................................... 243 Selecting a USB device.......................... 243 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 243

Data acquisition Vehicle..................................................... 29

Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 32

Data storage Data protection rights.............................. 32 Electronic control units............................ 29 Online services........................................ 32 Vehicle..................................................... 29

Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lamps

Daytime running lamps Activating/deactivating.......................... 120

Deactivating the alarm (ATA)........................... 86 Dealership

see Quali ed specialist workshop Declaration of conformity

Wireless vehicle components................... 25 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)........... 275 De nitions (tires and loading)....................... 319 Destination entry

Entering a POI or address....................... 238 Detecting inattentiveness

see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection.................................. 26 Digital Operator's Manual............................... 18 Dinghy towing

see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever

Engaging drive position.......................... 152 Engaging neutral.................................... 151 Engaging park position automatically...... 152 Engaging reverse gear............................ 151 Function................................................ 150 Selecting park position........................... 152

422 Index

Display (care)............................................... 280 Display (MBUX multimedia system)

Home screen......................................... 226 Operating.............................................. 227

Display (on-board computer) Displays on the instrument display......... 221

Display in the windshield see Head-up Display

Display message Calling up (on-board computer).............. 346 Notes..................................................... 346

Display messages - - - mph........................................ 373 h - - - mph........................................ 373 # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 389 K 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 353 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 391 : Active Headlamps Inoperative....... 355

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative..... 372 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... 373 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................. 354 $ Check Brake Fluid Level................ 371 + Check Coolant Level See Oper- ator's Manual......................................... 362 5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refu- eling...................................................... 397 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... 397 : Check Le Low Beam (example)... 354 h Check Tires.................................. 393 Check Washer Fluid...................... 360 J Close Trunk Separator................... 353 Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine O ...................................... 362 ! Currently Unavailable See Oper- ator's Manual......................................... 384

Currently Unavailable See Oper- ator's Manual......................................... 386 Don't Forget Your Key................... 351 Drive More Slowly......................... 383 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 399 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine O ................................. 398 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch O Engine.............................................. 399 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level........... 398 6 Front Le Malfunction Service Required (example)................................ 347 _ Front Le Seat Backrest Not Locked (example)................................... 360 8 Fuel Level Low.............................. 363 8 Gas Cap Loose............................. 363 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 385

Index 423

Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 386 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 387 G Inoperative................................... 388 : Intell. Light System Inoperative..... 355 Key Being Initialized Please Wait.... 351 Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 351 Key Not Detected (white display message)............................................... 350 6 Le Side Curtain Airbag Mal- function Service Required (example)...... 347 Lowering....................................... 383 Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... 382 : Malfunction See Operators Manual.................................................. 354 Obtain a New Key......................... 350 O ................................................ 374

O ................................................ 372 K Open/Close So Top Com- pletely.................................................... 353 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. 367 h Please Correct Tire Pressure......... 394 F Please Release Parking Brake........ 370 Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat- tery..................................................... 391 Replace Key Battery...................... 350 # See Operator's Manual................. 389 K So Top Lowering......................... 353 K So Top Operable Only up to 37 mph.................................................. 352 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required................................................ 347 Steering Malfunction Increased Physical E ort See Operator's Manual.... 358 Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual....... 359

# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run- ning....................................................... 390 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 390 Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low........ 382 Suspended................................... 374 : Switch O Lights........................... 355 : Switch On Headlamps................... 355 Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted...................................... 381 Temporarily Unavailable Sen- sors are Dirty......................................... 380 F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake................................... 371 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition O Before Exiting................. 357 Vehicle Rising Please Wait............. 383 Vehicle Rising............................... 383 h Warning Tire Malfunction.............. 394 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing............... 393

424 Index

K While stationary, apply the brakes before operating the so top....... 352 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 378 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative........ 378 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur- rently Limited See Operator's Manual..... 387 Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual.......................... 388 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 374 Active Distance Assist Inoperative.......... 374 Active Distance Assist Now Available...... 375 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 379 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative... 379 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 375 Active Steering Assist Inoperative........... 375

Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer- gency Stops........................................... 375 Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 376 Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... 377 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 356 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.... 356 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 356 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop- erative................................................... 357 Apply Brake to Shi from 'P'................... 364 Apply Brake to Shi to 'R'...................... 364 Apply Brake to Shi to D or R................. 364 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red dis- play message)........................................ 366

Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message).................................... 366 Beginning Emergency Stop..................... 376 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual..................... 377 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative.................. 378 Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual.......................................... 361, 391 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual.................................................. 372 Check Tire Pressure Soon...................... 395 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator......................................... 396 Cruise Control Inoperative...................... 373 Cruise Control O .................................. 373 Decrease Speed.................................... 395 Device Detected at Diagnostics Con- nection See Operator's Manual.............. 389 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away...... 365

Index 425

Engine Can Now Be Started................... 392 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................. 348 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................. 348 Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunction- ing......................................................... 357 Head-up Display Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual..................... 358 Head-up Display Inoperative................... 358 N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away...................................................... 365 Only Shi to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta- tionary................................................... 364 Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inop- erative See Operator's Manual............... 384 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... 352 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 349

Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ 365 Run Flat Indicator Inoperative................. 396 Service Required Do Not Shi Gears Visit Dealer............................................ 365 Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling...................... 366 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavail- able....................................................... 392 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............... 392 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors....................................... 393 Tires Overheated.................................... 395 To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine.................................... 364 To switch engine o , press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec- onds or press 3 times............................ 361 Tra c Sign Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual..................... 377

Tra c Sign Assist Inoperative................. 377 Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 365 Wiper Malfunctioning............................. 360

Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Door Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 70 Opening (from inside)............................... 68 Power closing function............................. 70 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 68

Door control panel......................................... 14 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)............ 315 Drawbar

see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving..................................... 141 Drive Away Assist......................................... 214 Drive position

Inserting................................................ 152 Drive program display.................................. 149

426 Index

Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT

Driver's seat see Seat

Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 165 Active Brake Assist................................. 184 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 166 Cameras................................................ 163 EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 168 ESP Crosswind Assist.......................... 167 Overview................................................ 164 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 163 Responsibility......................................... 163 STEER CONTROL................................... 168

Driving system DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 197

Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Tra c Sign Assist

Driving tips Breaking-in notes................................... 139 Drinking and driving............................... 141 General driving tips................................ 141 Optimized acceleration.......................... 140

Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Suspension............................................ 197

Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

DYNAMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indi- cator...................................................... 150 Con guring drive program I.................... 149 Displaying engine data........................... 150 Displaying vehicle data........................... 150 Drive program display............................ 149 Drive programs...................................... 148 Function................................................ 148 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)..... 149 Selecting the drive program................... 149

E E10.............................................................. 338 Easy entry feature

Function/notes...................................... 100 Setting................................................... 101

Easy exit feature Function/notes...................................... 100 Setting................................................... 101

EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Function/notes...................................... 168

ECO Assist Function/notes...................................... 146

Index 427

ECO display Function................................................ 146

ECO start/stop function Switching o /on.................................... 145

Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 160 Applying/releasing manually.................. 162 Emergency braking................................ 162 Releasing automatically.......................... 161

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 283 Overview of the help functions................. 16 Re ective safety vest............................. 282 Removing the warning triangle............... 282 Setting up the warning triangle............... 283

Emergency braking...................................... 162 Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency call

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Emergency key Locking/unlocking the doors................... 70

Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle................................ 138

Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside)............................... 75

Emergency spare wheel Notes..................................................... 331

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation................................................ 36

Engine Engine number....................................... 335 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 138 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 139

Engine data Displaying.............................................. 150

Engine number............................................. 335 Engine oil

Additives................................................ 340 Capacity................................................ 340 Checking the oil level using the on- board computer..................................... 269 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.................. 340

Quality................................................... 340 Re lling.................................................. 270

Error message see Display message

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

ESP

Crosswind Assist.................................... 167 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Activating/deactivating.......................... 167 Function/notes...................................... 166

Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 278

Exterior lighting see Lights

Exterior mirrors Automatic mirror folding function........... 128 Parking position..................................... 127

F Fatigue detection

see ATTENTION ASSIST First-aid kit (so sided)................................. 283

428 Index

Flacon Inserting/removing................................ 133

Flat tire Changing a wheel................................... 326 MOExtended tires.................................. 284 Notes..................................................... 283 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 285

Flat towing see Tow-bar system

Floor mats................................................... 111 Fog light (enhanced)..................................... 116 Foil covering

Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 163 Folding wind screen

Care...................................................... 278 Installing.................................................. 79 Removing................................................. 79

Fragrance see Fragrance system

Fragrance system Inserting/removing the acon................ 133

Free so ware................................................. 34

Frequencies Two-way radio........................................ 334

Front airbag................................................... 42 Front passenger seat

see Seat Fuel

Additives................................................ 339 E10........................................................ 338 Fuel reserve........................................... 340 Gasoline................................................ 338 Quality (gasoline)................................... 338 Refueling............................................... 154 Sulfur content........................................ 338 Tank content.......................................... 340

Fuel consumption indicator Calling up.............................................. 150

Function seat see Door control panel

Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 298 Dashboard fuse box............................... 300 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 298 Fuse box in the engine compartment...... 299

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot- well........................................................ 300 Fuse box in the trunk............................. 301 Notes..................................................... 298

Fuses see Fuses

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory.............................. 160 Garage door openers

Opening/closing the door...................... 160 Programming buttons............................. 158 Resolving problems................................ 160 Synchronizing the rolling code................ 159

Gasoline...................................................... 338 Gearshi recommendation........................... 153 Genuine parts................................................ 20 Glide mode.................................................. 153

H Handbrake

see Electric parking brake

Index 429

Handling (unusual)....................................... 302 HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................... 73 Hazard warning lights................................... 114 Hazardous substances

Information.............................................. 23 Head airbag................................................... 42 Head restraint

Front (adjusting mechanically).................. 91 Rear (removing/installing)........................ 92

Head space heating (AIRSCARF)..................... 97 Head-up Display

Adjusting brightness (on-board com- puter).................................................... 222 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 222 Care...................................................... 280 Function................................................ 221 Menu (on-board computer)..................... 222 Operating the memory function.............. 102 Setting the position (on-board com- puter).................................................... 222 Switching on/o .................................... 223

Headlamps see Automatic driving lights

Headliner (care)........................................... 280 Heating

see Climate control Help call

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam

Activating/deactivating.......................... 113 High beam

see Adaptive Highbeam Assist see Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

High-beam asher........................................ 113 Highway mode............................................. 116 Hill start assist............................................. 169 HOLD function

Function/notes...................................... 168 Switching on/o .................................... 168

Home screen (media display) Overview................................................ 226

Hood Opening/closing.................................... 267

I Identi cation plate

Engine................................................... 335 Refrigerant............................................. 343 Vehicle.................................................. 335

Ignition key see SmartKey

Immobilizer.................................................... 85 Indicator lamp

see Warning/indicator lamp Individual drive program

Con guring............................................ 149 Selecting............................................... 149

Inside rearview mirror Anti-glare mode (automatic)................... 126

Inside rearview mirror see Outside mirrors

Inspection see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster Function/notes.............................. 217, 218

430 Index

Instrument display Function/notes...................................... 218 Instrument cluster.................................... 10 Overview of displays............................... 221 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 399

Instrument display and on-board com- puter

Function/notes...................................... 217 Intelligent Light System

Activating/deactivating.......................... 116 Active headlamps................................... 115 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 117 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 118 Bad weather light................................... 116 City lighting............................................ 116 Cornering light....................................... 115 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 116 Highway mode....................................... 116 Overview................................................ 115

Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 120 Ambient lighting..................................... 120 Reading lamp......................................... 120 Switch-o delay time.............................. 121

Internet radio see TuneIn

Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- media system)....................................... 132

iPhone

see Smartphone integration

J Jack

Storage location..................................... 325 Jump-start connection

General notes........................................ 291

K KEYLESS-GO

Deactivating a function............................ 65 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 68 Problem................................................... 69 Unlocking setting..................................... 65

Kickdown Using..................................................... 153

Knee airbag.................................................... 42

L Labeling (tires)

see Tire labeling Lamp

see Interior lighting Lamp (instrument display)

see Warning/indicator lamp Lane detection (automatic)

see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language

Notes..................................................... 235 Setting................................................... 235

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor Installing.................................................. 55

Level control system see AIR BODY CONTROL

Light switch Overview................................................ 112

Lighting see Interior lighting

Index 431

see Lights Lights

Active headlamps................................... 115 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 117 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 118 Automatic driving lights.......................... 113 Bad weather light................................... 116 City lighting............................................ 116 Combination switch............................... 113 Cornering light....................................... 115 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 116 Hazard warning lights............................. 114 High beam............................................. 113 High-beam asher.................................. 113 Highway mode....................................... 116 Intelligent Light System.......................... 115 Light switch........................................... 112 Low beam.............................................. 112 Parking lights......................................... 112 Rear fog light......................................... 112 Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 112 Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time.............................................. 120 Standing lights....................................... 112

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o ................................................... 116 Switching the surround lighting on/o ... 120 Turn signal light...................................... 113

Limited Warranty Vehicle..................................................... 29

Live Tra c Information Switching the tra c information dis- play on................................................... 241

Load index (tires)......................................... 317 Load-bearing capacity (tires)........................ 317 Loading

Bag hook............................................... 107 Cargo tie-down rings.............................. 106 De nitions............................................. 319 Notes..................................................... 102

Loading guidelines....................................... 102 Loading information table............................. 309 Loads

Fixing..................................................... 102 Locking/unlocking

Emergency key......................................... 70 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 68

Switching the automatic locking fea- ture on/o .............................................. 70 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 68

Low beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 112

Lubricant additives see Additives

Luggage Parcel net.............................................. 108 Securing................................................ 102

Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)

Lumbar support (4-way)................................. 91

M MAGIC VISION CONTROL

Windshield wipers.................................. 124 Maintenance

Vehicle..................................................... 22 Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS

432 Index

Malfunction Restraint system...................................... 36

Maneuvering aid see Maneuvering assistance

Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating.......................... 216 Cross Tra c Alert.................................. 215 Drive Away Assist................................... 214 Maneuvering brake function................... 215

Maneuvering brake function......................... 215 Map

Displaying online map contents.............. 241 Displaying weather information.............. 241 Moving................................................... 240 Selecting the map orientation................ 240 Setting the map scale............................ 240 Switching freeway information on/o ..... 240

Massage program Overview.................................................. 94

Massage programs Resetting the settings.............................. 94 Selecting the front seats.......................... 94

Maximum load rating.................................... 316

Maximum permissible load Calculation example............................... 311 Determining........................................... 310

Maximum tire pressure................................. 316 MBUX multimedia system

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 163 Con guring drive program I.................... 149 Home screen......................................... 226 Notes..................................................... 224 Operating the touchscreen..................... 227 Overview................................................ 224 Restoring (factory settings).................... 235 Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 179 Setting the air distribution...................... 131 Setting the fragrance system.................. 132 Standby mode function.......................... 162 Switching ionization on/o .................... 132

MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system)

Mechanical key Inserting/removing.................................. 66

Media Overview of the functions and symbols... 258

Media mode Connecting Bluetooth audio equip- ment...................................................... 259

Medical aids................................................... 27 Memory function

Function................................................ 101 Head-up Display..................................... 102 Operating.............................................. 102 Outside mirrors...................................... 102 Seat....................................................... 102 Steering wheel....................................... 102

Menu (on-board computer) Head-up Display..................................... 222 Overview................................................ 219

Mercedes me app Information............................................ 252

Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ 249 Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center.................................................... 248 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center a er automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 249 Information............................................ 248

Index 433

Making a call via the overhead control panel..................................................... 248 Transferred data..................................... 250

Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management... 251 Information............................................ 251 Transferred data..................................... 252

Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 136

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call...................... 256 Information............................................ 255 Information about data transfer.............. 257 Manual emergency call.......................... 256 Overview................................................ 255

Message (instrument display) see Display message

Message memory......................................... 346 Mirrors

see Outside mirrors Mobile phone

see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Model type see Vehicle identi cation plate

MOExtended tires........................................ 284 MULTIBEAM LED.......................................... 115 Multifunction steering wheel

Overview of buttons............................... 219 Multifunction steering wheel

see Steering wheel Multimedia system

see MBUX multimedia system

N Navigation

Notes..................................................... 236 Overview................................................ 237 Showing/hiding the menu...................... 236 Switching on.......................................... 236

Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route

Neutral Engaging................................................ 151

O Occupant safety

see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt

Oil see Engine oil

On-board computer Displaying the service due date.............. 266 Head-up Display menu........................... 222 Instrument display................................. 221 Menu overview....................................... 219 Operating.............................................. 219

On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection

On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Charging................................................ 292

434 Index

Replacing............................................... 293 Starting assistance................................ 292

On-board electronics Notes..................................................... 333 Two-way radios...................................... 333

Online services Data storage............................................ 32

Open-source so ware.................................... 34 Opening the trunk lid using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 73 Operating uids

Additives (fuel)....................................... 339 Brake uid............................................. 341 Coolant (engine).................................... 341 Engine oil............................................... 340 Fuel (gasoline)........................................ 338 Notes..................................................... 337 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)...... 343 Windshield washer uid.......................... 342

Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system............... 23 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)................................ 25 Information.............................................. 23

Operating system see On-board computer

Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 21

Operator's Manual (digital)............................. 18 Optimized acceleration

Activating............................................... 140 Outside mirrors

Anti-glare mode (automatic)................... 126 Folding in/out........................................ 125 Operating the memory function.............. 102 Setting................................................... 125

Overhead control panel Overview.................................................. 12

P Paint (cleaning instructions)......................... 275 Paint code................................................... 335 Panel heating

Setting..................................................... 96 Panic alarm

Arming/disarming.................................... 65

Park position Engaging................................................ 152 Selecting automatically.......................... 152

Parking see Electric parking brake

Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating....................................... 208, 209 Adjusting warning tones......................... 209 Function................................................ 205 Switching o .................................. 208, 209 System limitations.................................. 205

Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist

Parking brake see Electric parking brake

Parking for an extended period..................... 162 Parking lights............................................... 112 Parking option

Selecting............................................... 241 Parking position

Exterior mirrors...................................... 127

Index 435

Storing the position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... 127

Parking service Selecting parking options....................... 241

PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto

Payload Calculation example............................... 311 Determining the maximum..................... 310

Perfume see Fragrance system

Perfume atomizer Setting................................................... 132

Perfume vial see Fragrance system

Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode... 163 Standby mode function.......................... 162

Permissible towing methods......................... 294 Pets in the vehicle.......................................... 63 Plastic trim (Care)........................................ 280

Power closing function Door........................................................ 70

Power supply Switching on (start/stop button)............ 136

Power washer (care)..................................... 274 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

Function.................................................. 49 PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 49 Reversing measures................................. 50

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Function.................................................. 50 Reversing measures................................. 50

Preventative occupant protection system see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Pro le Creating a new pro le............................ 231 Notes..................................................... 230 Selecting pro le options......................... 231

Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT

Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 20

Protection against collision see Maneuvering brake function

Pulling away see Driving tips

Q QR code

Rescue card............................................. 29 Quali ed specialist workshop......................... 27

R Radar and ultrasonic sensors

Damage................................................. 163 Radio

Overview of the functions and symbols... 260 Reading lamp

see Interior lighting Real wood (Care).......................................... 280

436 Index

Rear fog lamp Switching on/o .................................... 113

Rear seat see Seats

Rear view camera Care...................................................... 278 Function................................................ 200 Opening the camera cover (surround view camera)......................................... 205

Rear window heater...................................... 129 Re ective safety vest.................................... 282 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)

Notes..................................................... 343 Refueling

Refueling the vehicle.............................. 154 Regulatory radio identi cation

Indonesia............................................... 335 Small components................................. 335

Regulatory radio information Installation clearances........................... 335

Remote Online Charging the starter battery................... 138 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 138

Starting the vehicle................................ 139 Reporting safety defects................................. 28 Rescue card................................................... 29 Reserve

Fuel....................................................... 340 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system).... 235 Residual heat............................................... 132 Restoring (factory settings)

see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system) Restraint system

Basic instructions for children.................. 50 Function in an accident............................ 36 Functionality............................................ 35 Malfunction............................................. 36 Protection................................................ 35 Reduced protection.................................. 35 Self-test................................................... 35 Warning lamp........................................... 35

Reverse gear Engaging................................................ 151

Rims (care).................................................. 278 Roadside Assistance (breakdown).................. 22

Roll away protection see HOLD function

Roll bar Function.................................................. 49

Roof load..................................................... 345 Route

Calculating............................................. 239 Selecting options................................... 239

Route guidance with augmented reality Activating............................................... 239 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 239

Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 178 Setting................................................... 179

Run- at characteristics MOExtended tires.................................. 284

S Safety systems

see Driving safety system Satellite radio

Logging in.............................................. 264

Index 437

Setting music and sport alerts................ 264 Seat

4-way lumbar support.............................. 91 Adjusting (electrically).............................. 90 Adjusting (manually and electrically)......... 88 Automatic adjustment.............................. 93 Con guring settings................................. 93 Correct driver's seat position................... 87 Folding back the backrest (rear passenger compartment)....................... 106 Folding the backrest forwards/back (with memory function)............................ 94 Massage program overview...................... 94 Operating the memory function.............. 102 Panel heating........................................... 96 Resetting the settings.............................. 94 Setting options......................................... 14 Switching AIRSCARF on/o ..................... 97 Workout program overview....................... 94

Seat belt Care...................................................... 280 Fastening................................................. 40 Protection................................................ 37 Warning lamp........................................... 41

Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating............................ 41 Function.................................................. 41

Seat belt extender.......................................... 40 Seat belt warning

see Seat belt Seat belts

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 41 Reduced protection.................................. 38 Releasing................................................. 41 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 41 Seat belt extender.................................... 40

Seat cover (Care)......................................... 280 Seat heating

Activating/deactivating............................ 95 Seat ventilation

Activating/deactivating............................ 96 Seats

Folding the backrest forwards (rear passenger compartment)....................... 105

Selecting a gear see Changing gears

Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever

Self-test Automatic front passenger airbag shut o ............................................................ 46

Sensors (care)............................................. 278 Service

see ASSYST PLUS Service Center

see Quali ed specialist workshop Service interval display

see ASSYST PLUS Setting a speed

see Cruise control Setting the map scale

see Map Shi paddles

see Steering wheel paddle shi ers Shi ing gears

Gearshi recommendation..................... 153 Side airbag..................................................... 42

438 Index

Side windows Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment.......................... 62 Closing using the SmartKey...................... 84 Convenience closing................................ 84 Convenience opening............................... 83 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 83 Opening/closing...................................... 82 Opening/closing (all)............................... 82 Problem................................................... 85

Size designation (tires)................................. 317 SmartKey

Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 65 Battery..................................................... 66 Deactivating a function............................ 65 Energy consumption................................ 65 Function overview.................................... 64 Key ring attachment................................. 66 Mechanical key........................................ 66 Panic alarm.............................................. 65 Problem................................................... 67 Unlocking setting..................................... 65

SmartKey see SmartKey

Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Smartphone integration Overview................................................ 253

Snow chains................................................ 303 Socket (12 V)

Front center console.............................. 108 So top

Care...................................................... 276 Closing (so -top switch)........................... 75 Closing using the SmartKey...................... 84 Opening (so -top switch)......................... 75 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 83 Problem................................................... 79 Relocking................................................. 77

So -top switch............................................... 75 So ware update

System updates..................................... 232 Sound

PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 49 Wheels and tires.................................... 302 Wheels/tires.......................................... 302

Sound menu Functions overview................................ 265

Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Special seat belt retractor.............................. 55 Specialist workshop

see Quali ed specialist workshop Speed index (tires)....................................... 317 Standby mode

Activating/deactivating.......................... 163 Function................................................ 162

Standing lights............................................. 112 Start-o assist

see Optimized acceleration Start/stop button

Parking the vehicle................................. 156 Starting the vehicle................................ 137 Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. 136

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)...................... 138

Index 439

Starting see Vehicle

Starting assistance see Jump-start connection

Starting-o aid see Hill start assist

STEER CONTROL Function/notes...................................... 168

Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically).............................. 99 Adjusting (manually)................................. 98 Buttons.................................................. 219 Care...................................................... 280 Operating the memory function.............. 102 Steering wheel heater.............................. 99

Steering wheel heater Switching on/o ...................................... 99

Steering wheel paddle shi ers...................... 152 Storage areas

see Storage space Storage compartments

see Storage space

Storage space Armrest................................................. 105 Center console...................................... 105 Door...................................................... 105 Glove box............................................... 105

Stowage areas see Loading

Stowage compartments see Loading

Street names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. 239

Suggestions Con guring............................................ 231

Sulfur content.............................................. 338 Surround lighting

Switching on/o .................................... 120 Surround View

see 360 Camera Surround view camera

Care...................................................... 278 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera)................................................. 205 Selecting a view..................................... 205

Suspension Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)............................................. 198 Damping characteristics......................... 197 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 197

Suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL

Switch-o delay time Exterior.................................................. 120 Interior................................................... 121

Switching on the ignition see Vehicle

Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 131 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- media system)....................................... 132

System settings Overview of the system settings menu.... 232 Reset function (MBUX multimedia sys- tem)....................................................... 235

System settings see Language

440 Index

T Tailpipes (care)............................................. 278 Tank content

Fuel....................................................... 340 Reserve (fuel)......................................... 340

Technical data Component-speci c information............ 335 Information............................................ 333 Regulatory radio identi cation (Indo- nesia).................................................... 335 Regulatory radio identi cation of small components.................................. 335 Regulatory radio information.................. 335

Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... 247 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... 247 Functions in the telephone menu............ 247 Notes..................................................... 244 Operating modes................................... 246 Telephone menu overview...................... 246 Wireless charging (mobile phone)........... 110

Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony............................. 246

Temperature Setting the vehicle interior tempera- ture....................................................... 129

Temperature grade....................................... 314 Themes

Fastening............................................... 231 Through-loading feature

see Seats TIN (Tire Identi cation Number).................... 315 Tire and Loading Information placard............ 309 Tire characteristics....................................... 317 Tire in ation compressor

see TIREFIT kit Tire information table................................... 309 Tire labeling

Characteristics....................................... 317 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... 315 Load index............................................. 317 Load-bearing capacity............................ 317 Maximum tire load................................. 316 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 316 Overview................................................ 314 Speed rating.......................................... 317

Temperature grade................................. 314 Tire Quality Grading............................... 314 Tire size designation.............................. 317 Traction grade........................................ 314 Tread wear grade................................... 314

Tire load (maximum)..................................... 316 Tire pressure

Checking (manually)............................... 306 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. 307 Maximum............................................... 316 Notes..................................................... 303 Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- ing system............................................. 309 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 308 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 308 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 306 Tire pressure table................................. 305 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 285

Tire pressure loss warning system Function................................................ 308 Restarting.............................................. 309

Index 441

Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure..................... 307 Checking the tire temperature................ 307 Function................................................ 306 Restarting.............................................. 308

Tire pressure table....................................... 305 Tire Quality Grading...................................... 314 Tire temperature

Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. 307 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 306

Tire tread..................................................... 302 Tire-change tool kit

Overview................................................ 325 TIREFIT kit

Storage location..................................... 285 Using..................................................... 285

Tires Characteristics....................................... 317 Checking............................................... 302 Checking the tire pressure (manually)..... 306 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system)......................... 307

De nitions............................................. 319 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... 315 Flat tire.................................................. 283 Installing................................................ 329 Load index............................................. 317 Load-bearing capacity............................ 317 Maximum tire load................................. 316 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 316 MOExtended tires.................................. 284 Noise generation.................................... 302 Notes on installing................................. 321 Overview of tire labeling......................... 314 Removing............................................... 329 Replacing....................................... 321, 326 Replacing the wheel trim........................ 326 Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- ing system............................................. 309 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 308 Rotating................................................. 324 Selection............................................... 321 Snow chains.......................................... 303 Speed rating.......................................... 317 Storing................................................... 325 Temperature grade................................. 314 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 309

Tire pressure (notes).............................. 303 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 308 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 306 Tire pressure table................................. 305 Tire Quality Grading............................... 314 Tire size designation.............................. 317 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 285 Traction grade........................................ 314 Tread wear grade................................... 314 Unfamiliar handling................................ 302

Tool see Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether...................................................... 57 Touch Control

On-board computer................................ 219 Operating.............................................. 227

Touchpad Operating.............................................. 227

Touchscreen Operating.............................................. 227

Tow-bar system............................................ 216 Tow-starting................................................. 298

442 Index

Towing away................................................. 295 Towing eye

Installing................................................ 298 Storage location..................................... 297

Towing methods........................................... 294 Traction grade.............................................. 314 Tra c information

Switching on the display......................... 241 Tra c light data service

Display in the Instrument Display........... 190 Turning the display on/o ...................... 192

Tra c Sign Assist Function/notes...................................... 189 Setting................................................... 190 System limits......................................... 189

Transmission Engaging neutral.................................... 151

Transmission position display....................... 150 Transporting

Vehicle.................................................. 296 Tread wear grade......................................... 314 Trim element (Care)...................................... 280

Trunk lid Closing.................................................... 72 Emergency release (from inside)............... 75 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 73 Locking separately................................... 74 Opening................................................... 71 Opening dimensions.............................. 344

Trunk partition Closing.................................................... 77 Opening................................................... 77

TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 263

Turn signal indicator..................................... 113 Turn signal light

Activating/deactivating.......................... 113 Two-way radios

Frequencies........................................... 334 Notes on installation.............................. 333 Transmission output (maximum)............. 334

U Unlocking

see Locking/unlocking

Updates Important system updates...................... 232

USB port Front storage compartment.................... 105 Rear passenger compartment................ 109

V Vehicle

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 163 Correct use.............................................. 27 Data acquisition....................................... 29 Data storage............................................ 29 Diagnostics connection............................ 26 Equipment............................................... 21 Limited Warranty...................................... 29 Locking (automatically)............................ 70 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 70 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 68 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 68 Lowering................................................ 330 Maintenance............................................ 22 Medical aids............................................ 27 Parking for an extended period............... 162 Problem noti cation................................. 28 QR code rescue card............................... 29

Index 443

Quali ed specialist workshop................... 27 Raising................................................... 327 Standby mode function.......................... 162 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 138 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 139 Starting (start/stop button)................... 137 Switching o (start/stop button)............ 156 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 136 Towing................................................... 216 Ventilating (convenience opening)............ 83

Vehicle battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)

Vehicle camera Information............................................ 163

Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 150 Roof load............................................... 345 Turning circle......................................... 344 Vehicle height........................................ 344 Vehicle length........................................ 344 Vehicle width......................................... 344 Wheelbase............................................. 344

Vehicle data storage Event data recorders................................ 33

MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 33

Vehicle dimensions...................................... 344 Vehicle emergency start............................... 298 Vehicle identi cation number

see VIN Vehicle identi cation plate

Paint code............................................. 335 VIN........................................................ 335

Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)........ 138

Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada...................... 22

Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 163

Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit.............................................. 285 Towing eye............................................. 297

Ventilating Convenience opening............................... 83

Ventilation see Climate control

Vents see Air vents

VIN Identi cation plate................................. 335 Seat....................................................... 335 Windshield............................................. 335

Vision Removing condensation from the win- dows...................................................... 132

Voice Control System Function................................................ 229 Starting................................................. 230

W Warning lamp

see Warning/indicator lamp Warning system

see ATA (anti-the alarm system) Warning triangle

Removing............................................... 282 Setting up.............................................. 283

444 Index

Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp......................... 411 Active Brake Assist warning lamp.. 410 J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)......................................... 409 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only)..... 409 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)......................................... 408 Coolant warning lamp (red)........... 403 Coolant warning lamp (yellow)....... 404 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)........................ 407 F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................. 407 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... 405 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp...... 405 ESP OFF warning lamp................ 413 ESP warning lamp ashes........... 412 ESP warning lamp lights up......... 412

8

Fuel reserve warning lamp ashes......... 405 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up.......................................................... 406 Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 402 Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)........................ 408 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... 401 Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... 401 Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... 402 Suspension warning lamp (yel- low)....................................................... 411 ! The electric parking brake (yel- low) indicator lamp................................. 407 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes............................. 414 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up........................... 414

L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 410 Overview................................................ 399 PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 46

Warranty........................................................ 29 Washer uid

see Windshield washer uid Washing by hand (care)................................ 274 Water tank

see Air-water duct Weather information..................................... 241 Web browsers

Overview................................................ 253 Wheel change

Lowering the vehicle.............................. 330 Mounting a new wheel........................... 329 Removing a wheel.................................. 329 Removing/installing hub caps................ 326

Wheel rotation............................................. 324 Wheels

Care...................................................... 278 Checking............................................... 302

Index 445

Checking the tire pressure (manually)..... 306 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system)......................... 307 De nitions............................................. 319 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... 315 Flat tire.................................................. 283 Installing................................................ 329 Load index............................................. 317 Load-bearing capacity............................ 317 Maximum tire load................................. 316 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 316 MOExtended tires.................................. 284 Noise generation.................................... 302 Notes on installing................................. 321 Overview of tire labeling......................... 314 Removing............................................... 329 Replacing....................................... 321, 326 Replacing the hub cap............................ 326 Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- ing system............................................. 309 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 308 Rotating................................................. 324 Selection............................................... 321 Snow chains.......................................... 303 Speed rating.......................................... 317

Storing................................................... 325 Temperature grade................................. 314 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 309 Tire characteristics................................ 317 Tire pressure (notes).............................. 303 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 308 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 306 Tire pressure table................................. 305 Tire Quality Grading............................... 314 Tire size designation.............................. 317 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 285 Traction grade........................................ 314 Tread wear grade................................... 314 Unfamiliar handling................................ 302

Wi-Fi Setting................................................... 233

Wind de ector Care...................................................... 277

Wind screen Care...................................................... 277

Window li er see Side windows

Windows Care...................................................... 278 Opening/closing (all)............................... 82

Windows see Side windows

Windshield Defrosting.............................................. 129 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 122 Replacing the wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. 124

Windshield see Windshield

Windshield washer uid Notes..................................................... 342

Windshield washer system Re lling.................................................. 272

Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 121 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 122 Replacing the wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. 124

Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 303

446 Index

Wiper blades Care...................................................... 278 Replacing (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)..... 124 Replacing (windshield)............................ 122

Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 109 Mobile phone......................................... 110

Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity......................... 25

Workout program Overview.................................................. 94

Workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the E-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz E-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz E-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz E-Class Convertible 2022 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.